Home

Toshiba DP125F Fax Machine User Manual

1. OFF Page 3 Page 1 Page 2 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 3 Page 2 Page 2 Page 2 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 3 Page 2 Page 3 Page 1 Page 3 NOTES NOTES e The pages are automati e Collating is the responsi cally collated bility of the operator e Requires enough memo ry for the entire multi page document If there is not enough memory memory overflow the copying procedure will be canceled e Collation is slower than non collation because the entire document must be scanned into memory first then printing can oc cur Memory requirements are limited to one page ata time GC GP COLLATE COPY DEFAULT 1 0ON Elend OP ERATION COMPLE H T Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Letter Head Paper Reservation Setting This function allows you to re serve a particular Paper Tray for use with PC printing or copying functions Once selected the paper in this tray cannot be used for facsimile receptions even if the other paper tray s becomes empty NOTE This function is only avail able when the Optional Re cording Paper Tray s is at tached to the machine If you have already
2. Press the Scanner Cover Re lease Button to open the Scan ner Cover Wipe the Glass surface and the White Plate with a soft dry cloth e If it is very dirty wipe it with a cloth soaked in water and wrung out then wipe it with a dry cloth Wipe the ADF Pad and Rollers with a dry cloth e If it is very dirty wipe it with a cloth soaked in water and wrung out then wipe it with a dry cloth CAUTION Be careful not to injure your finger s on the ADF spring when you wipe the ADF pad When the Recorded Image is not Clear continued Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure continued 4 Close the Scanner Cover Close the Scanner Cover Make sure that the hooks on both sides are firmly latched When the Recorded Image is not Clear continued Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure 1 Open the Top Cover 2 Remove the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit 3 Wipe the Glass Surface of Laser Unit 4 Clean the Transfer Wire and Discharge Wire 5 Clean the Paper Guide Top Cover Release Lever Developer Assembly Grasp the Top Cover Release Lever to open the Top Cover NOTE If a problem with the Record ing Unit remains after this action you may require a new developer assembly or drum unit Check for dirt or paper un der the developer assembly with drum unit
3. Menu the Test Press Load the documents in the lf a document jam occurs dur To continue the ADF test MENU document tray and press ing transport the screen below press START is displayed START D ADF TEST O DOCUMENT JAM The documents will be trans PAGES XAR Load the documents again ported one by one and the then press OOOO ADF TEST LOAD DOCUMENT You can change the transport i MODE speed by pressing STD Fast FINE Same when HALF TONE is set Medium U FINE Same when HALF TONE is set Slow number of documents unloaded will be displayed at the lower right on the screen ADF TEST PAGES 001 After transporting all the documents y ADF TEST START TO RESTART OR STOP TO COMPLETED PAGES XXX Remove the jammed docu ment You can resume the test START by pressing O START To end the test press STOP ADF TEST PAGE NUMBER CORRECT 2 NO ADF TEST continued 4 Select the ADF Test Result 5 Completed the ADF TEST lf the number of documents loaded is consistent with the number of documents unload press If a document is not fed prop erly even once press The word OPERATION COM PLETED is displayed on the screen and the unit returns to the individual test selection screen The result of the ADF test can be confirm
4. Press MENU E E LINE MONITOR 2 OFF Turn ON the monitor speaker by pressing COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 ER TEL NUMBER H Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods or you may designate another option at this point e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Security Transmission This function prevents your fac simile from sending to an incor rectly dialed phone With this function set ON the dialed num ber will be checked against the remote facsimile s programmed Transmit Terminal ID TTI The transmission will only occur if the number dialed matches the remote party s number NOTE To change the default set ting of this function refer to page 91 The status selec tion in this operation will take precedence over the default setting Load the Document 2 Display the SET SECURITY TX Menu 3 Select the Option 4 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AAY 17 00 WED11 13 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 ENTER TEL NUMBER Press MENU E E SET SECURITY
5. 05 06 TL END AFTER SCAN g 04 RECOVERY TX d d s Press 3 SET MEMORY TX 2 OFF Select the desired transmission mode To set Memory Transmission to ON press To set Memory Transmission to OFF press OPERATION COMPLETED Send After Scan Default Setting This feature enables you to de termine whether dialing starts while the machine is scanning the documents or after the ma chine has scanned all docu ments in the Memory Send mode If dialing after scanning is se lected you can select to delete or send the scanned pages should the memory become full during scanning 1 Display the SEND AFTER SCAN Menu 2 Select the Send After Scan Option 3 Select the Memory Full Option 4 Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU GGG SEND AFTER SCAN 1 DIAL DURING SCAN 2 DIAL AFTER SCAN Select the desired Send After Scan Option To disable Send After Scan press The following is displayed for 2 seconds OPERATION COMPLETED Go to Step 4 To enable Send After Scan press Go to Step 3 WHEN MEMORY FULL 1 DELETE SCAN PAGES 2 SEND SCAN PAGES Select the desired Memory Full Option To delete the pages being scanned press 2 To send the pages scanned to memory press 2 OP
6. G P T Returns to Step 9 To RETAIN press GROUP NBR 0001 PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY TO ENTER OR ENTER TO SKIP Returns to Step 9 TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION Document Specifications The following table shows the specifications for original documents that can be used with the facsimile 216mm W x 1000mm L 8 5 in W x 39 37 in L Multiple Sheets Document Size 148mm W x 100mm L 5 83 in W x 3 94 in L Effective Scanning Width Up to 20 sheets Legal Size Up to 50 sheets Letter Size Max Capacity of Document Tray Thickness of 0 05 to 0 15 mm 0 06 to 0 12 mm Document 0 002 to 0 0059 in 0 0025 to 0 0047 in Type of Paper Uncoated on both sides NOTES e Operator assistance may be required for pages longer than 420mm 16 5 inches e For multiple sheets the documents must be the same size and paper type e A small border region of each document is not imaged when each document is scanned The effective scanning area is as shown in the figure below 216 mm 8 5 inches SEN Le 4 mm 0 16 inches Effective Scanning Area Letter Legal Size spr 2 5 mm 0 1 inches gt 214 mm 8 4 inches Caution If the documents are any of the following they should be copied to plain paper before transmitting e Torn wrinkled or damp pages e Folded pages or pages with h
7. ccccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 126 Relay Transmission Relay Relay Transmission Overview 0 06 126 Setting Up a Relay Box c cceccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeeseaeees 127 Deleting a Relay BOX 0 ceeceeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeaaaes 132 Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub 134 POLLING amp MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS cccccceeeeeees 136 Polling amp Mailbox Overview ssssessssssssirsssrsssrrserisssrrrsssrnnsrnnsrrnssrnnne 136 Polling ROS rvattion ansa nian o e a O a 136 Polling RECEPTION oraire a arai a AEEA EEEE A IET 136 Open Mailbox ITU T Compatible cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeetee 137 Simple amp Security Polling Reservation esseseeeseessseeerereereeeereesrresens 138 Public Mailbox Polling Reservation A 140 Simple amp Secure Polling 0 ceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 Multi Address Polling AA 143 CoOntinuOUS Polling og eerdzesbiedad ae ash eanan epa aater aaaea beans 145 Turnaround Polling 0 0 0 eee cece A AN 147 MAILBOX ITU T Compatible ccsccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 Setting Up a Mailbox 149 Deleting a Mailbox AAA 151 Sending a Document to a Mailbox Remote Hub 153 Reserving a Document to a Mailbox Local Hub 155 SETUP INTRODUC TION BASIC FUNCTIONS LISTS AND REPORTS JZ DO RO F O USER TEST MODE Retrieving
8. Go to Step 4 To print a cover sheet press When the printing is complete the display returns to Standby Mode the Enter the name of the remote party See page 37 for more informa tion on Character Entry Then press ENTER ENTER YOUR NAME Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet continued 5 Enter the Sender s Name Enter the Facsimile Number Enter your name See page 37 for more informa tion on Character Entry Then press ENTER lt EE COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL MEMORY 99 ENTER TEL NUMBER Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the follow ing dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Cover Sheet Format Your Station ID if preset max 40 characters Remote Station ID printed when preset to the Abbrevi ated Dial Number or One Touch Dial Key used for dial ing Max 20 characters FACSIMILE MESSAGE MAY 17 2000 RE TRANSMISSION TO ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST ABCDEFGHIVKLMNOPOR FAX NUMBER 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 FROM ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOR FAX NUMBER 12345678901234567890 TOTAL PAGE 0 Di Image Data Area T
9. auToO 5j TRAY 1 LT TRAY 2 LT TRAY 3 LG Bypass A4 Selectable Paper Trays and their paper size are displayed You may select the paper tray and paper size of your copies using the following keys Oe ie ales NOTE The Bypass Tray is dis played only when it is set for LT LG or A4 size Then press ENTER C If you select the Bypass Tray following is displayed THICK PAPER OFF If the thick paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray select ON by 4 or LIS and then Example Tray 1 LT is selected COP IES 1 99 E PAPER REDUC COLLATE ON Copying Procedure continued DN Select the Reduction Option 6 Select the Collating Option 7 Press the START Key Use the following keys to move to the third row to select the Re duction option NATO LES Use the following keys to select the desired Reduction option 100 AUTO 86 75 or 50 KEE NOTE If AUTO is selected for Pa per Tray in Step 2 you can not select AUTO for Reduc tion Then press ENTER lt 4 Example 86 reduction is selected COPIES 1 99 8 PAPER REDUC COLLATE ON Use the following keys to select the Collate option ON or OFF ER Example COLLATE ON is selected COPTES 1 99 E PAPER REDUC COLLATE W OFF When all settings are complete press e
10. cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeteeeeeneees 112 Recording Paper Size cescceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeseeneeeeseaaeeseaas 113 Reception Reduction Setting essessesessiesssreeriessrirsssrnsnrnnsrnnsrrnensrens 113 Reception Discard Setting ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeseeaeeeeeaeeeee 114 Reverse Order Printing Setting cccccesceececeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeees 115 Reception Multicopy Setting cccccccceeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeaeeeeee 116 TELEPHONE HANDSET OPERATION Optional 117 On hook Dialing est Zebra 117 Reine ur NIE 118 E le EE 118 COMMUNICATION STATUS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneneeeeeeeeeeeeees 119 Current Job Status ccccececceceeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeseaaeeeeeneeeeeseaeeseeueeeeeeaeees 119 Display amp Print Transmission Report 120 Communication Joumal 120 CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB cccsesesseeeee 121 Cancelling a Direct Transmission ccccccececeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteneees 121 Cancelling a Job Reservation cccceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeneeeees 121 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 123 MULTI ADDRESS TRANSMISSION BROADCASTING 123 Group Broadcast Transmission ssseesseeeeeeeir reset eeteeerrnsssrnessrrnsern nne 123 Multi Key Quick Broadcast Transmission esseeeeeeeeeese reer eerreeerereees 124 RELAY TRANSMISSION
11. Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press ITU MAILBOX MAILBOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP Select the 3 RELAY by press e SEND RELAY BOX NUMBER MAX20 Enter the Box Number max 20 digits Then press ENTER lt 4 L PROGRAM PASSWORD 1 YES 2 NO Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub continued 5 Enter the Box Number 6 Enter the Password for Reservation 7 Dial the Remote Hub Unit 8 Complete the Procedure If the remote hub unit has a password programmed press o Go to Step 6 If the remote hub unit does not have a password programmed press Go to Step 7 Enter the password to access the Relay Box QQQ YO PQRS TUV WXYZ CCL Then press ENTER ve ei D K TER TEL NUMBER EED DIL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY Enter the facsimile number of the remote hub unit using any of the following dialing meth ods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing
12. Abbreviated Dialer Registration continued 4 When a Preset ABB Dial Number is Active D Change the ABB Information If the selected Abbreviated Dial Number has been previously registered the following infor mation will be displayed on the LCD display ABB NUMBER ENTRY ALREADY ASSIGNED ABB NUMBER 001 NEW YORK OFFICE E 2 seconds ABB NUMBER ENTRY 1 CANCEL 2 MODIFY 3 RETAIN You can cancel modify or re tain Abbreviated Dial Numbers registered in this facsimile e CANCEL Deletes the information stored in the selected Abbre viated Dial Number It will also remove the number from all associated Group Di aling Directories e MODIFY Allows you to change the re mote facsimile number and or associated Location ID name This selection is rec ommended if the location is used in Group Dialing Direc tories e RETAIN Retains the selected Abbre viated Dial Number informa tion without modification 5a Cancel the ABB Dial Information 5b Modify the ABB Dial Information 5c Retain the Current ABB Dial Information To cancel or delete the con tents stored in the Abbreviated Dial Number press 2 to CANCEL ABB NUMBER ENTRY ABB NUMBER 001 CANCELLED es 2 seconds ENTER ABB NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLE
13. 1 my ease 2 Enable Disable the 3 Select the Desired 4 Select Another CODE Menu Department Code Option SETUP Item or Press Enable or Disable the Depart Select the desired option If you wish to continue repeat GGG MENU D EPT CODE ENTRY 2 NO ment Code function 2 for YES Enable for NO Disable If YES is selected the follow ing Department Code Menu is displayed CODE ENTRY NUMBER 1 99 Enter the code number of the desired department and press ENTER ps DEPT CODE ENTRY ALREADY ASSIGNED DEPT NBR 01 Supervisor DEPT CODE ENTRY 2 MODIFY 3 RETAIN XN z ER 2 seconds Press 2 To cancel or delete the previ ously displayed Department Code and return to the Depart ment Code Address Entry menu in Step 5 of Department Code Setting See page 56 To change the previously dis played Department Code and return to Step 6 of Department Code Setting See page 56 To retain the previously dis played Department Code with out modification and return to the Department Code Address Entry menu in Step 5 of Depart ment Code Setting See page 56 Steps 2 and 3 After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or pre
14. Enter the number of the remote facsimiles using any combina tion of the following dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 e Group Dialing See page 123 After each entry the selected facsimile is displayed for 2 sec onds MULTI POLLING ABB NUMBER 009 GREENSVILLE PLANT Repeat this procedure until all remote facsimiles are entered ULTI POLLING ENTER MORE OR PRESS START Multi Address Polling continued DN Select the Security Code Option 6 Enter the Security Code d Complete the Procedure When all the remote facsimile locations have been entered in Step 4 press ENTER MULTI POLLING SECURITY CODE 2 NO If the remote facsimile is a TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4 digit security code is programmed to the document to be polled se lect 1 YES by pressing Q If the remote facsimile is not a TOSHIBA facsimile or no Secu rity Codes are being used se lect 2 NO by pressing Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6 Enter the 4 digit security code for the document to be re trieved ABC GHI JKL PQRS TUV WXYZ UI OOO POLLING SECURITY CODE H When the 4 digit security code is entered press ENTER The f
15. illuminated 2 Ze PAPER JAM Lamp 3 YV LINE 2Lamp l Blinks when an original document or recording paper jam occurs see page Blinks when communicating using Line 2 233 4 CG PC COMM Lamp Is ie RECORDING PAPER Lamp Blinks when the recording paper supply has been depleted see page 20 Blinks when communicating between the facsimile unit and a personal computer 5 SUPER POWER SAVER key and SUPER POWER SAVER Lamp SE TONER Lamp Press this key to select the Super Power Saver Mode Blinks when the toner is nearly or entirely exhausted see page 28 Illuminated when the facsimile is in the Super Power Saver Mode 5 DRUM Lamp 6 LCD Display Blinks when the Process Unit is at or near its end of life see page 31 Displays machine status and configuration information for operator viewing and inter action A ALARM Lamp Is blinks when any error other than those listed above occurs see page 7 INSERT Key This key is used to insert characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode see page 36 8 DELETE Key 226 This key is used to delete characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode see page 36 9 Dial Keypad Use these 12 keys just like a telephone keypad to dial telephone facsimile num bers see page 35 10 MULTI Key Performs Multi address Transmissions Broadcast or a Multi polling receptions see page 124 11 SPEED DIAL Key Used for accessing Abbreviated Alphabet or Group dialing telephone d
16. 3a Save within TOSHIBA Viewer 3b Save as a file on your hard disk a 000o o Right click on the new phonebook file and select Save NOTE When you click the v button or X button to close the screen TOSHIBA Viewer will prompt you to save the file e LO E D b e nl D P P b a VW ain ype Ee 9900 o Right click on the new phonebook file and select Save as The Save settings screen appears Designate the location on your hard disk and enter an appropriate file name then click on OK NOTE The phonebook file is saved as a set file on your hard disk The file extension is sei This file can be retrieved by TOSHIBA Viewer Browse Folders continued Creating a Routing Rules When an image is scanned it is normally stored in the Scanned images folder You can change the action by defining one or more Routing rules User Routing Rules are e Created and maintained by any TOSHIBA Viewer user e Specific to the user e Processed by the TOSHIBA Viewer user in the order they are shown from top to bottom Some sample rules are sup plied with TOSHIBA Viewer To activate them go to the Routing Rules dialog select a suitable sample to base your own rule on click Copy click Modify enter the incomplete information and click Finish to store the completed rule For further details of Routing Rules click Help on the Routing Rules dialog to view related hel
17. If no recording paper is placed in the Recording Paper Tray the screen below is displayed You can resume the test by loading the paper SWITCH TEST LOAD PAPER IN THE UPPER TRAY If an Optional Recording Paper Tray is installed follow the same test procedure as above for the Middle and Lower Re cording Paper Trays Remove the Process Unit When the absence of a Pro cess Unit is detected the screen below appears After checking that the screen is dis played install the Process Unit Detects the absence of a Process Unit SWITCH TEST PUT IN THE PROCESS UNIT Install the Process Unit SWITCH TES UNLOAD PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY If no Bypass Tray is installed or no recording paper is placed in the Bypass Tray the screen below is displayed DOES THIS MACHINE HAVE A BYPASS TRAY 1 YES 2 NO If Bypass Tray is installed or no paper is placed in the By pass Tray press Go to Step 6 If no Bypass Tray is installed press Go to Step 7 Remove the recording paper from the Bypass Tray When the absence of recording paper is detected the screen below appears After checking that the screen is displayed load the paper Detects the absence of recording paper in the Bypass Tray SWITCH TEST LOAD PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY Load the paper SWITCH TEST FLI
18. Multi address Transmission Re ports To ALWAYS print a Transmis sion Report whenever a docu ment is transmitted press 2 To only print a Transmission Re port when an error has occurred press To turn off automatic printing of Transmission Reports press PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE 2 OFF the document on the transmis sion report press Q To not print a first page image of the document on the trans mission report press The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COMPLE H D After completing the Mult Ad dress Transmission Report Set ting you may continue to select other Report settings referring to their associated pages for in struction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Multi Polling Report Setting Display the polli 1 MULTI POLL 2 Multi polling Report Options REPORT Menu Press Select the desired option for After completing the Multi poll MENU f SET MULTIPOLL REPORT 1 ALWAYS 2 ON_ERROR 3 0FF Multi polling Reports To ALWAYS print a report whenever a document is trans mitted press To only print a report when an error has occurred press To turn OFF automatic printing of this report press The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COM
19. OPERATION COMPLE H el After 2 seconds the display re turns to Step 1 To complete the STOP procedure press o Enter the redial counter value 00 to 14 ABC DEF JKL MNO PQRS Tuv WXYZ 21010 OOO Then press ENTER 7 d The following screen is dis played OPERATION COMPLE H D After 2 seconds the display re turns to Step 1 To complete the STOP procedure press ol Auto Receive Mode This setting allows you select Auto or Manual reception When Auto is selected your facsimile will automatically re ceive the documents after a pre set ring delay When Manual is selected you need to answer the call to receive the docu ments 1 Display the AUTO RECEIVE Menu 2 Select the Desired Receive Mode 3 Enter the Ring Delay 4 Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU GGG AUTO RECEIVE MODE 1 AUTO RECEIVE 2 MANUAL RECEIVE the desired Receive for AUTO RECEIVE for MANUAL RECEIVE Select Mode If AUTO RECEIVE is selected the following will be displayed AUTO RECEIVE RING DELAY 01 10 i If MANUAL RECEIVE is se lected the following will be dis played for 2 seconds continue to Step 4 OPERATION COMPLE H el Enter the desired number of rings 01 to 10 before
20. SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 3 SEP d DND This item is outside the LCD frame To view it use the y scroll key To complete Sub Address entry or skip this option press 2 The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 COM OPTIONS 2 DELAYED COMM 3 TX REPORT To enter a SUB type Sub Ad dress press SUB ADDRESS COMM SUB MAX20 Enter the required number max 20 digits then press ENTER Returns to Step 9g 1 SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 2 SEP d PWD To enter a SEP type Sub Ad dress press SUB ADDRESS COMM SEP MAX20 Enter the required number max 20 digits then press ENTER Returns to Step 9g 1 SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 2 SEP 4 PWD To enter a PWD type Sub Ad dress press SUB ADDRESS COMM PWD MAX20 Enter the required number max 20 digits then press ENTER Returns to Step 9g 1 SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 2 SEP 4 PWD Abbreviated Dialer Registration continued 9 Select Communication Options continued 10 Assign the Abbreviated Dial Number to a One Touch Key 9h Select the Telephone Line 10a Assign the One Touch Key 10b Use a Preassigned One Touch Key If your facsimile is equipped with the Line 2 Board you will be able to designate which phone
21. amp TIME HH MM Move the cursor to the desired position using the following keys Get Enter the time TUV WXYZ When 12 hour is selected change the AM PM designation by pressing the following keys EE When the correct time is en tered press ENTER lt SET DATE MODE 2 DD MM YYYY 3 YYYY MM DD 4 MM DD YY 5 DD MM YY 6 YY MM DD Date and Time Setting continued 5 Select the Date 6 Select the Month 7 Select Another Format Format SETUP Item or Select the date format for dis Select the month format After completing this Configura play and print tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in for NUMERIC such as 01 02 structions or press for Month Day Year 4 digit 03 STOP for Day Month Year 4 digit for NAME such as JAN FEB MAR to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode OPERATION COMPLE el for Year 4 digit Month Day Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP for Day Month Year 2 digit menu screen for Month Day Year 2 digit for Year 2 digit Month Day SET MONTH MODE 1 NUMERIC 2 NAME Terminal ID Setting In compliance with FCC regula tions see page 1 this facsimile places your
22. 5 Enter the Box Number 6 Select the Password Option 7 Enter the Password Select 2 BOX SETUP by pressing TYPE OF BOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL TYPE 2 BULLETIN BRD TYPE 3 RELAY Select 38 RELAY by pressing ENTER NEW BOX NBR BOX NUMBER MAX20 Enter the Relay Box number max 20 digits Then press ENTER L PROGRAM PASSWORD 2 NO Select whether or not to use the password option for this relay box To set the password option for this relay box press Q Go to Step 7 If you do not wish to set the password option with this relay box press Go to Step 8 Enter the password max 20 digits ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD MAX20 xxxxxi Then press ENTER a RELAY END NUMBER PRESS SPEED DIAL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY Setting Up a Relay Box continued 8 Enter the End Station Repeat this step until all of the required end station are en tered Then go to Step 9 8a Enter the One Touch Key of End Station 8b Enter the Abbreviated Dial Number of End Station 8c Enter the Group Number of End Station If an end station is assigned to a One Touch Key press Example One Touch Key 35 35 LC RELAY END NUMBER ONE TOUCH 35 XXXXXX After 2 seconds y
23. COMM RESERVATION ENTER ACCOUNT CODE OR PRESS START Enter the 4 digit Account Code COMM RESERVATION ACCOUNT CODE Wad Then press ENTER NOTE It is possible to send a docu ment without entering an Ac count Code Simply press START ENTER CD or The facsimile starts scanning the document into memory When document scanning is complete the display returns to the Standby Mode SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 244 RESIDUAL MEMORY 80 Cover Sheet Registration This function enables the at tachment of a cover sheet to the document being transmitted Prior to selecting this function for the first time you may wish to prepare a Cover Sheet image Logo to be used on the cover sheet See Step 4 of this proce dure 1 Display the COVER SHEET Menu 2 Enable Disable the Cover Sheet 3 Include an Image on the Cover Sheet 4 Load the Image Document Press MENU OOOO COVER S 1 ON Enable or Disable the Cover Sheet attachment for ON Enable for OFF Disable When ON is selected the fol lowing screen is displayed WITH IMAGE 1 YES 2 NO When OFF is selected the OPERATION COMPLETED message will be displayed Con tinue to the final step To include an image a scanned com
24. Previous Job in the List ARK SINGLE TRANSMIT REDFIELD EX MAY 29 23 25 FILE NBR 123 ol I Next Job in the List When the desired job screen is displayed press ENTER A screen like the one below is displayed CANCEL FILE NBR LES 2 NO To confirm deletion press To not cancel the selection press JOB CANCELLED FILE NBR ll x x x ADVANCED FUNCTIONS MULTI ADDRESS TRANSMISSION BROADCASTING Group Broadcast Transmission The Group Broadcast Transmis sion feature allows you to send a document to multiple remote parties in a single operation Note that a Group Broadcast Transmission requires all pages to be scanned to memory prior to dialing and thus adequate re sidual memory is required NOTE If the optional handset is in stalled the handset dialing is not available 1 Load the Document 2 Select the Group Location 3 Enter the Group Number 4 Press the START Key Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Press the One Touch Key pro grammed for the desired group 35 CL Va COMM RESERVATION ONE TOUCH 35 COLORADO GRP EE 2 seco
25. Secure RX Activation Period Setting This section describes the pro cedure to setup the DP120F DP125F to automatically acti vate Secure RX during a speci fied time period Prior to setting this option you must have a se curity code set in the facsimile NOTE If a security code is not set the DP120F DP125F auto matically prompts the secu rity code setting See the preceding section for details on setting the security code 1 Display the SECURE RX Menu 2 Select the Option 3 Enter the Security Code Press MENU SECURE RX 01 SECURITY CODE 02 ACTIVITY MODE To set the activity period for Se cure RX press 0 0 If a security code is not set the DP120F DP125F auto matically prompts the secu rity code setting See the preceding section for details on setting the security code SECURE RX SECURITY CODE Enter the current security code QQG QO JKL PORS TUV WXYZ CLOTS OOO Then press ENTER L SECURE RX IL ON Secure RX Activation Period Setting continued 4 Activate the Automatic Secure RX 5 Enter the Start and End Time 6 Select 24 HOUR SECURE RX Option 7 Set for Each Day 8 Complete the Procedure To activate automatic Secure RX during a specified time pe riod press Q Go to Step 5 To de a
26. The following screen is dis played to confirm your selec tion OPERATION COMPLE el After completing the Reception Journal Setting you may con tinue to select other Report set tings referring to their associ ated pages for instruction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Press the following key to setup automatic printing of the TX and RX Journals whenever 150 transactions have taken in place To turn ON Automatic printing of journal press Q To turn OFF Automatic printing of journal press The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COMPLE H el After completing the Reception Journal Setting you may con tinue to select other Report set tings referring to their associ ated pages for instruction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Direct Transmission Report Setting 1 Display the SET TX 2 Select the Option for 3 Select the Option for A5 SIZE PRINT REPORT Menu Direct Transmissions Press Select the desired printing option To reduce the report size and After completing the Direct MENU for non memory direct transmis print on A5 size paper press Transmission Report Setting 4 sions you may continue to select i p other Report settings referring to To ALWAYS print a Transmis
27. Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press CONTRAST SET CONTRAST 2 DARKER 3 LIGHTER Select the desired Contrast level To select NORMAL press Q To select DARKER press To select LIGHTER press Your contrast setting is now set You may continue with your di aling sequence to send the document COMM RESERVATION EMORY 100 NUMBER RESIDUAL ENTER TEL Default Setting for Memory Transmission Memory Transmission allows your facsimile to quickly scan documents to memory and re turn them to you You do not have to wait for the transmission to be completed This increases productivity as others do not have to wait in line to send a facsimile Each time you send a facsimile with memory transmis sion the amount of residual memory will be reduced Additionally each time you send a memory transmission a com munication reservation or File Number is assigned When Memory Transmission is not selected the Direct Docu ment Transmission tray mode is active by default setting This allows your facsimile to function without the use of document memory 1 Display the Default Setting Menu 2 Display the MEMORY TX Menu 3 Select the Transmis sion Mode Press MENU 2 E DI MEMORY TX 02 SECURITY TX 03 COVER SHEE H
28. cccceeeeeeceeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeee Simple Polling Reservation c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Power Failure et EENEG er Power Saver Operation Printer Power Saver ccccceeeececeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeaaeeseeneeessaaeeeeaas Super Power Saver o ccccccecccccesesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeecaeeseeneees Preset Dial Number Lists see Lists amp Reports Print Print Density Setting ceceececeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesseeeteaes Printing Supplies Replacement ccccceccseeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeeeaes Reverse Order Printing Setting ccccceeeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeesetaeeeeenes Privileged RECEPTION 20 ee eeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseneeeeeenseneeeeseneneaees Public Mailbox Reservation 0 eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeseeeaees Q Qualty TX EE Quick Stam er inka ana e a e ean Castle ae atte R Rear VIEW asaina iniii E ea NED E NE eE EREN NA TN 11 Rece VINO E 112 Automatic Receiving Mode A 112 Manual Receiving Mode 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeees 112 Selecting Quick Gart 34 The Receiving Mode eiiiai in aaen ANE A 112 Receiving Interval Setting ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneeeeetaeeesneeetenees 62 Reception Journal seoskivencniraro a ae tie e r a EEN 205 Automatic Output TED 196 ManualOutput E 196 E le ecient ea ee ee 195 Reception List Settings
29. cccceeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeessaes 235 Recording Unit Cleaning cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeseaaeeeeaes 237 Communication Journal 0 ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeesecaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeee 205 Settings Au eet handle Quid adele ee 195 Communication Status Display and Print Transmission Report cceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 120 Displaying Current Job Status cccceecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeessaaeeeeaes 120 Confidential Box eege 149 Configuration SUMMALY ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeececeeeeeeaeeeeseaaeesecaeeeeeeeeeeetiaaeeee 45 Continuous Poling denssi eiiiai en acta va Ohana EES Ee 145 Contrast ue DEE 90 Copy Reduction nines anini aati dante dae et ini ee 95 GODYING EE 94 Page Collating Function 0ccccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesseaaeeeeaes 94 Page Collating Function Default Setting 0 ccccessseeeceeessteeeeeeees 65 Paper Size For Copying cccccccececceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeseeeesssaeeeseaes 94 FROCUGTHION 2e eeneg cevaesuecdecds AAO E EAEAN 96 REEL 96 Cover Sheet Attaching a Cover Sheet 187 Printing a Cover Sheet 187 e EE EE 165 D Datesand Time ee Eege eee a 40 Default e fcc csicleenie eased relist tide aia ae ewes 64 Document Mode 22 ccececcccceeeeseeceeeeeeeeeceeceneeneeceeeeesneseceeeeenneneeeeenentegs 64 Contrast Level cccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeee
30. paper A Effective Letter mm Recording Area inches 8 5 Legal mm inches 8 5 NOTES e When AUTO is selected as the Paper Tray setting you cannot select AUTO for Reduction setting e When AUTO is selected as the Paper Tray setting the paper is not supplied from the tray specified for Letter Head Paper or Separator Page However you can select a tray manually by selecting the Paper Tray e The following copy resolutions are available FINE FINE HALFTONE U FINE U FINE HALFTONE At the time of copying the COLLATE function may be selected This function will sort multiple page copies into sets of correct order pages Output Examples of Printed Copies With COLLATE Function ON With COLLATE Function OFF Page 3 Page 1 Page 2 Page 1 Page 1 Page 1 Page 3 Page 2 Page 2 Page 2 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 3 Page 2 Page 3 Page 1 Page 3 NOTES NOTES e The pages are automatically col e Collating is the responsibility of lated the operator e Requires enough memory for the e Memory requirements are limited entire multi page document If to one page at a time there is not enough memory memory overflow the copying procedure will be canceled e Collation is slower than non colla tion because the enti
31. APR 15 00 SAT11 13 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LINE SELECT C NOTE If no Line 2 Board is in stalled an error prompt will result from this application TEL LINE SELECT 2 LINE 1 3 LINE 2 Select the desired option To not select a specific line press To select Line 1 press To select Line 2 press COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL MEMORY 80 TER TEL NUMBER Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods or you may designate another option at this point e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Alphabet Dialing See page 98 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Enabling or Disabling Send After Scan Temporarily With the Send After Scan Mode Default Setting set to OFF this feature allows you enable the Send After Scan mode for a single transmission Once that transmission is complete the default status is regained With Send After Scan selected every page of the doument will be scanned into memory before dialing will begin With Send After Scan set to NO off your DP120F DP125F will begin dialing after the first page is scanned to memory 1 Load the Document 2 Display the
32. Displayed for 2 seconds The display returns to Step 1 Go to Step 7 to entering the Super Power Saver mode Q GHI MNO PQRS Tuv WXYZ 2 OOG START TIME TIME get 3 When the correct time period is displayed press ENTER lt OPERATION COMPLE H Displayed for 2 seconds The display returns to Step 1 Go to Step 7 Power Saver Operation continued D Select the Printer Power Saver Function 6 Enter the Start Time and End Time 7 Select Another SETUP Item or Enable or Disable the Printer Power Saver function Q to set Printer Power Saver ON to set Printer Power Saver OFF If ON is selected the currently set time period is displayed be low The time on the left is the Printer Power Saver start time or time that the printer unit will power down The time on the right is the Printer Power Saver end time PRINTE R POWER SAVER TIME PERIOD 00 00 00 Example if the 24 hour format option is selected in DATE amp TIME setting PRINTER POWER SAVER TIME PERIOD 12 Joam 12 00am Example if the 12 hour format option is selected in DATE amp TIME setting When OFF is selected the OPERATION COMPLETED message is displayed as shown at the bottom in Step 6 Returns to Step 1 Move t
33. Enter the Individual 5 Department Code Address 6 Enter the Individual Department Code Name 7 Enter the Department Code Password Select Another SETUP Item or Enter a 5 digit Master Depart ment Code Password using the Dial Keypad This password will be required to gain supervisor access to the machine Important Record this pass word in a safe location so that it can be retrieved if it is lost or forgotten ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS Tuv WXYZ When the password is correctly entered press ENTER lt S MASTER CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR 01 REGISTERED CODE ENTRY NUMBER 1 99 ye 2 seconds After entering the Master De partment Code password the facsimile will prompt for an Indi vidual Department Code ad dress Select an Individual Department Code address from 02 to 99 After selecting the Individual De partment Code address press ENTER ra DEPT CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR 02 DEPT NAME MAX20 e 2 seconds TER NAME DEPT NAME MAX20 The Department Code Name entry menu is displayed Department Codes NBR 02 through 99 are used as Indi vidual Department Codes Enter the Individual Department Code name using the Keyboard See page 36 if you need help select ing characters When the name is correctly
34. The auto test starts appears on the screen indicating that the test is under way AUTO TEST AUTO TEST To suspend the auto test STOP press ol to showing the standby mode screen The results of the auto test can be confirmed with the self test report To print the self test re port refer to PRINTING A TEST RESULT on page 252 If the result of the auto test is judged to be NG call your ser vice representative INDIVIDUAL TEST MODE INDIVIDUAL TEST Summary In INDIVIDUAL TEST mode you can perform specific tests on this facsimile 1 Enter the INDIVIDUAL TEST Menu 2 Select the Desired INDIVIDUAL TEST 01 07 Press MENU E E 01 ADF TEST 02 KEY TES 03 LED TES 04 LCD TEST JL 05 SPEAKER TEST 06 SWITCH 07 TES NOTE Only 4 selections can be displayed at one time MENU Press Ly or 4 the desired INDIVIDUAL TEST is displayed or enter the de sired INDIVIDUAL TEST 01 through 07 using the dial key pad until ADF TEST The ADF test checks the op eration of the ADF by trans porting and unloading docu ments You can check that the ADF is normal if the number of documents loaded is consis tent with the number of docu ments transported and un loaded 1 Select the ADF TEST 2 Load the Document 3 To Continue or Exit
35. These items are outside the LCD frame To view them use the w scroll key The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option Sub Address Communications allow a variety of specialized facsimile communications SUB Sub Address Transmission Allows documents to be routed through remote LAN Facsimile devices to specific users work stations Allows documents to be trans mitted to specific Mailboxes in remote facsimile SEP Selective Polling Allows documents to be re trieved from specific Mailboxes in remote facsimiles PWD Password Allows secure communications to SUB and from SEP compat ible devices IMPORTANT If you designate an incorrect sub address the communica tion will result in an error If you designate an unnecessary sub address the communication will result in error Abbreviated Dialer Registration continued 9 Select Communication Options continued 9g Sub Address Communication continued 9g 1 Select the Sub Address Comm Options 9g 2 Complete the Sub Address Comm Options Setup 99 3 Select a SUB Sub Address 99 4 Select a SEP Sub Address Communication Communication 99 5 Select a PWD Sub Address Communication If the remote party assigned to the Abbreviated Dial Number re quires or provides a Sub Ad dress to route or retrieve mes sages press Returns to Step 8g 1
36. Determine New or Existing Code 4 Enter the Current Security Code Press MENU SECURE RX 01 SECURITY CODE 02 ACTIVITY MODE To select a security code for the first time or to change an exist ing security code press OO If the security code already ex ists and you wish to change the current code go to Step 4 When you enter a security code for the first time go to Step 5 If a new code needs to be en tered If the code already exists SECURITY CODE ENTRY NEW CODE SECURITY CODE SECURITY CODE ENTRY CURRENT CODE SECURITY CODE EENE Before you change the security code you must enter the exist ing code to gain the access Enter the current security code QQQ YO PQRS Tuv WXYZ Q OOO Then press ENTER i Go to Step 5 If the correct code is entered following is displayed SECURITY CODE ENTRY NEW CODE SECURITY CODE E Enter a New Security Code Enter your new 4 digit security code The screen shown below is displayed to confirm your en try gt D O DEF MNO OQO OG PQRS TUV WXYZ GG Then press ENTER Your security code entry is now complete Go to Step 7 of next section to set your Activity Pe riod OPERATION COMPLE E
37. NOTES e Only one Public Mailbox polling reservation can be set at one time e When a Simple Polling reservation is reserved Public Mailbox reserva tion is not available 1 Load the Document 2 Display the POLLING RESERVE Menu 3 Select PUBLIC FAX M BOX 4 Complete the Procedure Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press POLLING POLLING 1 POLLING 2 POLLING RESERVE 3 PROG CONT POLL Select 2 PUBLIC FAX MAIL BOX by pressing POLLING RESERVE 1 POLLING 2 PUBLIC FAX MAILBOX The facsimile starts scanning the document SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 140 RESIDUAL MEMORY 70 When the document scanning is complete the display returns to the Standby Mode NOTE If a Public Mailbox operation is already reserved the fol lowing screen is displayed ALREADY ASSIGNED ADD RETAIN 2 3 You may select one of the fol lowing three options 1 CANCEL Select this option to replace the previous reservation 2 ADD Select this option to add this document to the existing res ervation 3 RETAIN Select thi
38. Remove the Developer Assem bly with the Drum Unit IMPORTANT e Never touch the photo conductive drum the green surface of the Drum Unit If the surface is scarred or scratched it will cause print quality problems e While removing any jammed paper do not ex pose the photoconduc tive drum of the Drum Unit to light for more than 3 minutes If the Drum Unit is to be left any where outside the fac simile be certain to cover it with cloth paper etc Clearing a Recording Paper Jam continued 5 Pull Up on the Green Paper Feed Release Lever 6 Remove the Jammed Recording Paper 7 Return the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit and Close the Cover Paper Feed Release Lever Pull up on the green paper feed release lever If there is any jammed paper remove it in the direction of the arrow being careful not to tear the recording paper If a recording paper is jammed at the Fuser Section remove the jammed paper CAUTIONS e As the Fuser Section is heated pay special at tention when handling it If hot allow the fuser to cool prior to touching e Do not pull the recording paper out to the exit side Install the Developer Assembly with the Drum Unit and close the Right Side Cover Then close the Top Cover firmly IMPORTANT e When closing the Right Side Cover close it firmly until a click sound is heard on both sides e When the
39. Supply recording paper to the lower paper tray No recording paper exists in any paper tray Supply recording paper to the paper tray s The toner is nearly exhausted warning Replace the toner The toner is exhausted Replace the toner see page 28 The drum unit is approaching the end of its life warning Replace the drum unit see page 31 The drum unit has reached the end of its life Replace the drum unit see page 31 No developer assembly exists Install a developer assembly Line 1 is not connected to the telephone line Correctly connect a modular phone cord be tween the telephone line jack and the LINE1 connector on the right side of the machine see page 18 CHECK LINE 2 Display only when Line 2 is installed NETWORK ERROR NETWORK DISABLED PCL DISABLED DEVICE ERROR XX Line 2 is not connected to the telephone line Correctly connect a modular phone cord be tween the telephone line jack and the LINE2 connector on the right side of the machine see page 18 With the Optional NIC board installed a net work connection is not detected Insure you have a proper network connection If the same error message is displayed again call your service representative Optional NIC board is out of order Network related features do not work Power your machine off then back on If the error condition is cleared confirm normal op eration If the error condition returns call your ser
40. 1 11 AC Power Cord EE 1 service Save the carton and packing materials for future 3 Document Exit Tray 1 12 Charger Cleaner 1 isa Document Exit Tra Charger Cleaner ccccceeeeeeseeeeteeeeees 4 Recording Paper Exit Tray eese 1 13 Mylar Scraper ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeees 1 Check the items in the carton with the following packing 5 Fuser Cleaner 1 14 Cotton Swab 1 isi IF anything Ie missing contact your dealer immedi Fuser Cleaner ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeees A res eaten ately 6 Developer Assembly AAA 1 15 Unpacking Heport AA 1 T Drum Unit 000 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 16 Quick Reference Guide ssessesseeeen 1 8 Operators Manual 1 17 TOSHIBA Viewer CD ROM 1 9 e EE a yates 1 18 Bypass Tray DP125F only 0 eee 1 3 Select a Desirable Location The unit should be installed e Ona horizontal surface e Away from direct sunlight dust extreme heat and humidity and vibration e Away from sources of strong electrical or magnetic fields such as televisions or radios e Within reach of an electrical outlet Use an outlet not shared with equipment that generates electrical noise or consumes large amounts of electricity such as an air conditioner or a copier e Within reach of a telephone connection Use a dedicated single line telephone connection e Allow for adequate ventilation The rear and sides of the unit need to be clear to
41. Hyper Scan Document Scanning Allows letter sized originals to be scanned into memory in as little as 1 2 seconds per page 73 Programmable One Touch Autodialer Keys Allows remote locations to be quickly dialed at the touch of a key saving time and eliminating mis dialed phone numbers 300 Abbreviated Autodial Locations In addition to the 73 One Touch Autodialer Keys 300 abbreviated locations can also be programmed with other frequently called locations These locations can then be easily accessed using abbreviated codes ranging from 001 to 999 22 Function Keys Twenty two frequently used functions are assigned to the keys located on the One Touch Index Panel These keys allow direct access to frequently used function settings and operations Multi address Broadcast Transmission This feature allows the transmission of a document to multiple remote units with one operation sequence Locations may be selected using the autodialer or infre quently dialed locations that have not been preregistered Multi Memory Access Operation Allows up to 5 operations such as transmission or reception on either line 1 or line 2 if so equipped printing scanning and programming to be performed at the same time Super Power Saver Mode Reduces power consumption to approx 2W by turning all unnecessary functions off in the standby mode Substitute Memory Reception When the recording paper or supplies have been depleted or in the event of a recor
42. Memory Capacity Machine Type Applicable Networks ECM G3 Exclusive Modes EX Horizontal 8 dots mm 203 dpi 16 dots mm 406 dpi Vertical 3 85 lines mm 97 8 lines inch 7 7 lines mm 196 lines inch 15 4 lines mm 391 lines inch V 17 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps V 34 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps JBIG MMR MR MH Electrophotography and Laser Printing GaAlAs Laser Diode Max 5 mW wavelength 780 nm Standard 3MB for DP120F 7MB for DP125F Optional Memory Card 4 MB Board DP120F only Desktop type with both transmission and re ception functions PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network Power Required 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumed Max 550 W operating 2 W or less standby in Super Power Saver mode Unit Dimensions Width 590 mm 23 2 inches Depth 596 mm 23 5 inches Height 338 mm 13 3 inches All dimensions excluding protrusions Weight About 24 5 kg 54 0 Ibs Outer appearance specifications etc may be changed without prior notice If any trouble is encountered contact your authorized TOSHIBA facsimile dealer The clock function and programming data of this device are preserved with a built in battery If the power supply is cut off over a long time the battery may become discharged causing the recorded data to be lost Document image data received by this device is p
43. NOTES You can load up to 100 sheets of Letter Legal A4 or A5 size paper 20 lbs Envelope transparency or label stock should be loaded one sheet at a time Place the paper in the center of the Bypass Tray when the paper size is set to Al OTHERS 1 Remove the Bypass Tray Cover 2 Install the Bypass Tray 3 Set the Paper Size 4 Raise the Tray Lever N all Tray Cover Tray Lever SE Remove the two screws holding the Bypass Tray Cover Install the Bypass Tray Set the paper size using the size selector Raise the Tray Lever Bypass Tray Installation continued 5 Pull up the Paper G Set the Recording 7 Lower the Tray Support Paper Lever Tray Lever Paper Guide Z gt zl LETTER LEGAL Bypass Tray Paper Support 124 Set the Recording Paper and Lower the Tray Lever adjust the Paper Guides to the correct paper size Pull up the Bypass Tray Paper Support Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation 1 Open the Top Cover 2 Shake the Developer Assembly 3 Remove the Protective Strip A Attach the Drum Unit to the Developer Assembly 5 Install the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit Top Cover Release Lever Developer Assembly Developer Assembly 041 Drum EB BR CR 0
44. RELAY END NUMBER TOUCH 35 ER MORE OR PRES START 1 O H D Go to Step 8 If an end station is assigned to an Abbreviated Dial Number press SPEED DIAL Sch Enter the Number Abbreviated Dial AB bi o m a Q D c E a TU lt OE COL Git END NUMBER ABB NUMBER 1 999 KR Then press ENTER lt RELAY END NUMBER ABB NUMBER XXXXXXXX XXX After 2 seconds RELAY END NUMBER ABB NUMBER TER MORE OR PRESS START XXX Go to Step 8 If an end station is assigned to a Group Number press SPEED DIAL L Enter the Group Number gt D bi o m a MNO Tuv QOO GG OO END NUMBER GROUP NBR 1 1999 xx Setting Up a Relay Box continued 8 Enter the End Station continued Q Complete the End Station Entry 1 0 Enter the Number to send the Transmission Result 8c Enter the Group Number of End Station 8d Cancel or Retain the Existing Station continued Then press If the End Station One Touch ENTER lt Key Abbreviated Dial Number or Groups Number designated in Step 8a 8b or 8c have al S ready been entered under the RELAY END NUMBER same Relay Box the following BOOP r
45. Using a cotton swab clean the silver contacts found in the rear of the developer chassis Separate the Drum Unit from the Developer Assembly Clean the Charger Wire in the Drum Unit with a Charger Cleaner Insert the Charger Cleaner per pendicularly until it contacts the case Then move the Charger Cleaner in one direc tion horizontally slowly WARNING Moving the Charger Cleaner quickly or at an incorrect angle may damage or break the Charger Wire When the Recorded Image is not Clear continued Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure continued 11 Clean the Metering Blade 12 Return the Charger Cleaner and Mylar Scraper 13 Clean the Mylar Sheet 14 Attach the Drum Unit to the Developer Assembly 15 Return the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit and Close the Top Cover Metering Blade Charger Cleaner c Mylar Scraper Drum Unit Mylar Scraper Developer lt d Toner Roller 028 042 Assembly Attach the Drum Unit to the Install the Developer Assem When a white line occurs on the black toner roller of Devel oper Assembly scrape off the dust or toner between the me tering blade and black toner roller with a Mylar Scraper Return the Charger Cleaner and Mylar Scraper to the storage lo cation provided inside the fac simile Clean the mylar sheet of the Developer Assembly with
46. Click Select Back to Scan multiple pages dialog For further details of scanner settings click Help to view a related help topic Click Scan Back to Scan multiple pages dialog File Scan continued Scanning with your DP120F DP125F or other TWAIN compatible scanner continued DN Select the Scanned pages 6 Select what you do with the scanned images Click Add Repeat all scanned pages are added into a document If you want to continue scanning repeat from step 3 to NOTE You can add the scanned pages in desired order to create a multi page document For further details of the Scan multiple pages dialog click Help to view a related help topic Click OK Mew waae vecggeed TTT ER I Seared maj Ra Soanned image has been completed ks do prs aand bo do ath di CN ke it 0 oi in a tde C Del hk at dl Cimos Help Click OK For further details of the New message received dialog click Help to view a related help topic TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer Printing from TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad You can print a document using TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer if you have selected to create a printer during the installa tion You can print a document from TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad and other applications NOTE TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer is created as same as the Windows printer drivers in Printers folder If you have not created you can also create a TOSHIBA
47. INITIAL SETUP 1 LANGUAGE 2 DATE amp TIME 3 TERMINAL ID 4 DIAL TYPE DEFAULT SETTING 1 MACHINE SETTINGS 01 SPEAKER VOLUME 01 RINGER VOLUME 02 ALARM VOLUME 03 KEY TOUCH VOLUME 04 MONITOR VOLUME POWER SAVER SEPARATOR PAGE DEPARTMENT CODE ACCOUNT CODE PRINTER DENSITY DOCUMENT LENGTH LINE MONITOR RECEIVE INTERVAL EC DOCUMENT MODE COLLATE COPY LETTER HEAD PAPER REDIAL MODE 01 INTERVAL 02 COUNTER 5 AUTO RECEIVE MODE 6 LINE 2 MODE 2 TX SETTINGS 01 MEMORY TX 02 SECURITY TX 001 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 3 RX SETTINGS 01 SECURE RX 02 MEMORY RX 03 RX REDUCTION 04 DISCARD 05 REV ORDER PRINT 06 PRIVILEGED RX 07 RTI 08 RX MULTI COPY 4 REPORTS amp LIST 01 JOURNAL 02 COMM REPORT 01 TX REPORT 02 MEMORY TX REPORT 03 MULTI ADD REPORT 04 MULTIPOLL REPORT 05 RELAY ORG REP 06 RELAY STN REP 07 SET RELAY END REP RECEPTION LIST 01 LOCAL MAILBOX 02 REMOTE MAILBOX 03 RELAY REMOTE SERVICE 01 REMOTE ACCESS 02 DOWNLOAD 03 RDC PASSWORD 04 SUPPLY ORDER LIST MODE AUTO TEST INDIVIDUAL TEST 01 ADF TEST 02 KEY TEST 03 LED TEST 04 LCD TEST 05 SPEAKER TEST 06 SWITCH TEST 07 TEST PRINT 3 TEST RESULT LIST Issues a list of menu items through which functions or op tions can be set This list can be a useful guide during machine programming Printing Procedure To d
48. Press MONITOR The facsimile is connected to the telephone line and the dial tone is heard through the speak er ON HOOK H EL NUMBER Dial the facsimile number of the remote party using any of the four dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 NOTE lf an incorrect number is di STOP aled press and fol low the instruction displayed on the LCD display to start the operation over Example of screen displayed while a number is entered using Keypad Dialing ON HOOK TEL NUMBER 0559761234 When you hear the answering START tone press Lo If an operator answers the phone pick up the handset if equipped and inform the re mote party that you wish to send a document Upon hearing the facsimile tone press START ES When the transmission is com pleted the facsimile returns to the Standby Mode MAY 17 00 WED11 54 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 Direct Transmission continued Off hook Transmission Optional Handset Dialing This procedure may be useful when you want to talk with a remote party using the optional handset of the facsimile before sending a document 1 Load the Document 2 Pick Up the Handset Optional 3 Dial the Facsimile Number
49. To save the new settings within the TOSHIBA Viewer go to Step 4a To save the new settings as a file on your local hard disk go to Step 4b 4a Save within TOSHIBA Viewer Ab Save asa file on your hard disk a Ble 2 le fe E CIS Right click on the new settings file and select Save NOTE When you click the Y button or X button to close the screen TOSHIBA Viewer will prompt you to save the file a SCSCeCRS d el et A D Ke ooo a t Right click on the new settings file and select Save as The Save settings screen appears Designate the location on your hard disk and enter an appropriate file name then click on OK NOTE The settings file is saved as a set file on your hard disk The file extension is set This file can be retrieved by TOSHIBA Viewer Browse Folders continued Add Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP120F DP125F TOSHIBA Viewer permits you to remotely add edit One Touch and or Abbreviated Number contacts on your DP120F DP125F 1 Open the Devices folder 2 Change the settings Cow a c Setup device phonebook amp Devicename Status EI Select the device and click Setup device phonebook button Reading data from device appears as Viewer interrogates the attached facsimile Li T Hp dana tocar dia Thi ap dt afes ven r L eei
50. port refer to PRINTING A TEST RESULT on page 252 If the result of the key test is judged to be NG call your ser vice representative LED TEST 3 Select the Test Result The LED test checks LED op eration by lighting all the LEDs on the Operation Panel 1 Select the LED TEST Menu 2 Check the LCDs Option 4 Completed the LED TEST Press MENU LED TEST CHECK IF ALL LEDS ARE TURNED ON STOP TO COMPLE H T Visually check that all the LEDs are on After checking STOP press ol ENTER TEST RESULT lf all the LEDs are turn on press H even one LED press 3 is not lit The word OPERATION COM PLETED is displayed on the screen and the unit returns to the individual test selection screen The result of the LED test can be confirmed with the self test report To print the self test re port refer to PRINTING A TEST RESULT on page 252 If the result of the LED test is judged to be NG call your ser vice representative LCD TEST The LCD test checks LCD op eration by turning on and off all the elements of the LCD on the Operation Panel 1 Select the LCD TEST Menu 2 Start the LCD Test 3 Select the Test Result Option 4 Completed the LCD TEST Press CD WILL TU
51. DELAYED COMM TIME HH MM 23 3 Then press ENTER ES DELAYED COMM TIME 23 30 Displayed for 2 seconds The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option Abbreviated Dialer Registration continued 9 Select Communication Options continued 9d Transmission Report 9e Line Monitor Speaker 9f Quality TX 9g Sub Address Communication To request a Transmission Re port automatically after sending documents using this Abbrevi ated Dial Number select SET TX REPORT 1 0ON To enable a TX Report press Q To disable a TX Report press The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option To enable disable the facsimi le s Line Monitor Speaker when dialing this Abbreviated Dial Number press Q LINE MONITOR 1 0 2 OFF To enable the monitor speaker press To disable the monitor speaker press The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option To transmit documents to this Abbreviated Dial Number at a lower speed for poor line condi tions press To cancel the QUALITY TX op tion press To select 14400BPS press Q To select 9600BPS press To select 4800BPS press QUALITY TX HSG OFF 14400BPS Q9600BPS m4 4800BPS
52. ITU MAILBOX Used for Mailbox Communications or Relay Trans mission with remote facsimiles that support the ITU T F code functions see page 149 COVER SHEET Used to attach a cover sheet to a document to be transmitted see pages 165 and 187 50 51 52 53 54 CHAIN DIAL CHARGE DELAYED DIRECT TX l COMM CODE COMM l l l l 55 56 57 58 59 LOW SPEED ITU COVER PRIORITY MAILBOX SHEET l l l l 60 61 62 63 64 RECOVERY SEND AFTER POLLING SUB ADDRESS I e SCAN com J Function Keys l l l 65 66 67 67 69 PCL PRINT JOURNAL PREV TX RESERVATION SECURE TX RPT LIST l 70 71 72 73 l CHECK TEL LINE TEL LIST TEL LIST CONTRAST l l E MAIL SELECT ENTRY PRINT l I le eS eet e I 01 49 KEYBOARD PRIORITY TX Sends pages set in the ADF ahead of all previously scheduled transmissions see page 183 RECOVERY TX Recovers from memory and sends incomplete trans missions see page 169 SEND AFTER SCAN Used to select whether the dialing starts while the machine is scanning the documents or after the ma chine has scanned all documents to memory see page 190 POLLING Designate polling communication see page 138 SUB ADDRESS COMM Add sub address digits
53. Letter Head Paper Setting cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeteeeeeeeenaeeens 66 Setting Redial Interval and Counter ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeseaeeeeteneees 67 Auto Receive Mode cccceeeeeeeccceteeeeeeneeeeteeeeeneeeeseeeeeeneeeeseeneeneaeetes 68 Lin6 2 Operation EE 69 BASIC FUNCTIONS 2 esgeggedeedueseesgengeteeceregeueeeu eeggegeg 70 AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE DIALING ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 Abbreviated Dialer Registration ccceccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaaeeees 70 One Touch Dialer Registration cccececeeeeeeeeseceeeeesereeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeneees 77 Group Number Registration 0 ccccceeceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 83 TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION eessen 87 Document Specifications c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeneeeeeaaeeee 87 Document Loading a i000 Anau sia ie ieee eas eels 88 Scan Resolution Setting cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeneeeseeaeees 89 Contrast Setting senan iaa aeaa araa aa bedeapheatigbaeysteatheteeiees 90 Default Setting for Memory Transmission ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 91 Send After Scan Default Setting 0 ccccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeaeees 92 Default Setting for Security Transmission cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenteeeees 93 COPYING A gecuersseueeeugses eeeuetsggegsEeKCEENKNEg EE niaaa nadine 94 Paper Siz for opd dei raa a a a a aaa
54. NOTE If the Collate option is se lected the document will be scanned into memory first COPYING PAPER TRAY 1 LT REDUCT 86 COPIES PAGES 01 DIALING METHODS Your TOSHIBA facsimile pro vides various dialing methods One Touch Dialing Dials remote locations with the touch of a single key See page 77 for program ming Abbreviated Dialing Dials remote locations using an abbreviated dial number from 001 to 999 See page 70 for programming Alphabet Dialing Allows location selection us ing an alphabetic index search of the Location IDs programmed into One Touch and Abbreviated Dialing Di rectories Keypad Dialing Accepts unregistered tele phone number entry directly from the operation panel See other dialing related func tions on the following pages Multi Key Dialing page 124 Chain Dialing page 166 Redialing page 110 Monitor amp pages 106 Handset Dialing and 107 Setting Redial page 67 Interval amp Counter One Touch Key Dialing If you have programmed a re mote party s facsimile number to a One Touch key you can dial that number by pressing the corresponding One Touch key The document must be loaded and the resolution and contrast settings set before a transmis sion using One Touch Key dial ing 1 One Touch Key Dialing Select the desired One Touch key from 01 to 73 see page 77 for programming Example One T
55. New settings file is created Aid stings fie Orn Corea Eras fe S Dekie GE eg Right click on the new settings file and select Load NOTE In order to create a user phonebook file to be saved on your hard disk refer to the section Saving the Phonebook The Load settings screen appears Designate the hard disk location of the desired set file select the file then click on Open The set file is loaded Continue to Step 2c 0 e Left click and hold on the user phonebook file then drag it to the device phonebook file and release the left mouse button NOTE Initially your mouse pointer will become a circle with diagonal line Upon reaching the desired phonebook file the pointer will take the form of an address label Upon releasing the left mouse button the contents of the user phonebook file are copied to the device phonebook file Click the v button to download the new settings to your DP120F DP125F NOTE Click the X button to cancel adding editing the phonebook con tacts Browse Folders continued Saving the Phonebook The device phonebook opened by TOSHIBA Viewer default name TOSHIBA is a temporary working file Every time TOSHIBA Viewer is opened the program accesses the attached facsimile and reads the current phonebook settings You can store the phonebook settings within TOSHIBA Viewer or save as a Set file on your hard disk This is useful
56. START nothing happens The recording paper does not come out Cause A document is still in your facsimile Solution STOP Press to remove the document The modular cord tele phone line cable is dis connected Firmly connect the modular cord at both ends There is no power to the unit Check that the power plug is plugged into the AC outlet and the power switch is ON There is no recording pa per Load recording paper in the re cording paper tray The top cover is not closed fully Press down the top cover until it clicks at the two latching po sitions If the handset is installed and after talking with the remote party through the handset the handset is returned before pressing START START Press first then return the handset Something is wrong with the sending machine The top cover is not closed fully Ask the sending party to re transmit the document Press down the top cover until it clicks at the two latching po sitions Problem Cause Solution After the recording pa per has been re placed a PAPER EMPTY error mes sage remains on the LCD display The received docu ment is difficult to read Unnecessary lines are printed You receive a docu ment that is complete ly blank even though you and the remote party followed the cor rect procedures Recording paper jam occurs frequently The recordin
57. STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Monitor Volume Adjustment The line monitor volume can be adjusted using the following pro cedure 1 Display the MONITOR VOLUME Menu 2 Enter the Desired Volume Value 3 Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU GGG The current setting is highlight ed on the bottom row SET MONITOR VOLUME VOLUME 0 7 0123567 Enter the desired volume value 0 to 7 O for minimum 7 for maximum GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ or Move the cursor to the desired position using the following keys O When the desired value is dis played on the LCD display press ENTER OPERATION COMPLE 4 el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other volume settings referring to their associated pages for instructions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Power Saver Operation This function allows you to mini mize power consumption by turning power off to portions of the machine as selected If the Power Saver function is ON a warm up period is needed be fore printing occurs This fac simile has two Power Saver modes Super Power Saver and Printer Power Saver Super Power Saver turns virtual
58. STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Setting Redial Interval and Counter If the destination facsimile you called is busy your facsimile will automatically redial the number up to the number of attempts set by this procedure In addition your DP120F DP125F will try to redial every 1 minute by default If desired you may change these redial settings Redial Counter The Redial Counter sets the number of redial attempts The default setting is 5 You may change the number of redials from 0 to 14 attempts Redial Interval The Redial Interval sets the length of time between redial at tempts The default redial inter val is 1 minute You may change the interval from 1 to 15 minutes 1 Display the REDIAL MODE Menu 2 Select the REDIAL Option 3 Enter the Redial Interval 4 Enter the Redial Counter Press MENU e 4 REDIAL MODE 01 INTERVAL 02 COUNTER Select the desired REDIAL op tion To select the Redial Interval press Lol REDIAL MODE INTERVAL 01 15MIN OH Go to Step 3 To select REDIAL COUNTER press O O REDIAL MODE COUNTER Go to Step 4 Enter the interval value 01 to 15 in minutes Q GHI JKL PQRS TUV WXYZ UI a OG Then press ENTER L The following screen is dis played
59. Toshiba Phonebook Setup appears When you want to change the current de vice phonebook go to Step 2a When you want to change the phonebook by copying the settings from a set file located on your hard disk go to Step 2b When you want to change the phonebook by copying the settings from a user settings file stored within TOSHIBA Viewer go to Step 2c For further details on phonebook setup refer to Help 2a Edit the phonebook H Leen Fes eee EZE pee Seer E D lt j fbi pp a 000 o To add new phonebook contacts click on Abb Numbers Group Numbers or One Touch Keys in the left pane Then double click on Add e g Add Abb Number in the right pane Tel List Entry appears at the end of the existing list Double click on the desired items and enter the appropriate values LUED E Ee bet ae S T F F 3 a a a pp Ge Li 000 o To edit phonebook contacts double click on the item you want to edit then enter the new data Click the v button to download the new settings to your DP120F DP125F Click the X button phonebook contacts to cancel adding editing the Add Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP120F DP125F continued Browse Folders continued 2 Change the settings continued 2b Load a set file from your hard disk 2c Copy the phonebook settings D a S 6000o Double click on Add settings file A
60. c ccccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeeeneeeeseaaeeee 254 Hub Station see Relay Transmission or Mailbox l Initial Setting Date And Time cccceceececeecneceeeeeeceeeeeeeeee ee eae eaaaeaaaeeesaasaeaaeeaeeeeeees 40 Dial Type EE 44 Blue E Le GE 39 Terminal D wo 2leciteci eevee lee ad aie ee a aa i ai 42 ITU T Compatible oo ce cceeeeeceecececeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeaeeseeeeestaaeeseeeeeeesaeeesnes 149 J dobei steieeggisegieuggeneg feet de deelen cevbacareid clad bedsielt capeasasouecend E 119 Journals see Communication Journals K ET ne WEE 100 L Language Selectionati eetan aeaa a aaa ai aa ieden 39 Letter Head Paper Setting ccccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeeeeeseaeeeseas 66 Line Monitor ALWAYS o Tice ccet diet rae Za cease ce acces etch ected a 61 TrANSMISSION OPTIONS a s iniia ia i i s 193 Use with Abbreviated Number registration cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 73 Use with One Touch key registration ccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeteee 79 Ree EE 189 Kine 2 Operation EE 69 Lists see List and Reports List And Reports Print Format And Printing Procedure sasen 195 Department Control List c ccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeteeees 217 FUNCTION Det ee eveel ee ee alte eee ence ede ace Sed ea a ee 223 Memory Transmission Report AA 208 Menu Det Eege HANNEN nacelle 224 Multi Address Transmission Report A 210 Multi Polling Repor A 211 Open
61. displayed on the LCD display press ENTER The entered name is displayed on the bottom row r N DEPT CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR 02 Sales Dept e 2 seconds a gt DEPT CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR 02 F CODE Enter a 5 digit Department Code Password using the Dial Keypad This password will be required to gain user depart ment access to the machine Important Record this pass word in a safe location so that it can be retrieved if it is lost or forgotten ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUN WXYZ When the password is correctly entered press ENTER lt a gt DEPT CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR 02 REGISTERED us 2 seconds a N CODE ENTRY NUMBER 1 99 If you want to continue entering the Department Codes repeat Steps 5 through 7 After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Department Code Maintenance The Department Code Mainte nance is used to cancel or change the Master or Individual Department Code This procedure can only be per formed by a supervisor who possesses the Master Depart ment Code Password Enter this password before proceeding
62. generating the TONE signal can be accom plished by pressing TONE NOTE From the moment Lys is TONE pressed until the end of that transaction or until you press cS again the touch TONE tone MF signals will be transmitted when you press any key on the Dial Keypad Redialing When the number you dialed is busy or you want to redial the last number you dialed you can recall the last number dialed us REDIAL in f PAUSE To use redialing with voice call e MONITOR ing you must press pick up the optional handset of the facsimile first NOTE To prevent others from redialing your call press STOP while in the on hook or off hook status This will clear the phone number reg ister 1 Press the MONITOR or Pick Up the Handset 2 Press The REDIAL Key Pick up the optional telephone handset or press MONITOR L You hear the dial tone through the speaker or the handset ON HOOK H EL NUMBER Press REDIAL PAUSE The last dialed number or ID name is displayed and redialing starts immediately ON HOOK TEL NUMBER 0559761234 COMMUNICATION STATUS Current Job Status The job being processed can be monitored via the LCD You can cancel the job if necessary NOTES e When no communication job is being processed only the number of re served jobs is displayed as below PENDING JOBS Xx CAN
63. press To select the Bulletin Board Box press ENTER NEW BOX NBR BOX NUMBER MAX20 Enter the Mailbox number max 20 digits Then press ENTER a i PROGRAM PASSWORD 1 YES 2 NO Select whether or not to use the password option for this mail box To set the password option for this mailbox press oC Go to Step 7 If you do not wish to set the password option with this mail box press Go to Step 8 NOTES e If you selected the Confi dential Box in Step 4 a password must be used if the document is to be re trieved remotely The re mote facsimile will re quire its operator to enter this password before be ing able to retrieve the document e If you selected the Bulle tin Board Box in Step 4 assigning a password will require a password to be entered before any docu ments can be reserved into the Bulletin Board Box Enter the password max 20 digits ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD MAX20 ad Then press ENTER lt The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds to indicate that the Mailbox is reg istered REGISTERED Deleting a Mailbox This section describes the pro cedures to delete an existing Mailbox in a DP120F DP125F hub unit NOTE If a document exists in the Mailbox you want to delete this operation is not allowed until the document is re trieved
64. then pulls the docu ment into the scanning area and stops When a Carrier Sheet is used documents must be sent one page at a time manually fed When the document sheet is longer the Document Tray as sist it with your hand to insure proper feeding After the facsimile pulls the document into the scan position slightly and stops you may change the resolution and con trast settings It may also be changed before or during the document loading To cancel a document already set and pulled in press STOP If your document is extremely dark or light or if it contains photographs you may wish to adjust the contrast and resolu tion settings See the following pages Scan Resolution Setting The scan resolution can be set Omg to one of the following five a modes based on the type of im Q Press PE until the required resolution mode is MODE q age you are scanning indicated by the appropriate LED The scan resolution is normally set to the default setting When illumi you change the resolution the The mode changes as follows 2 S A facsimile will return to the de fault setting after each transac tion To change the default reso lution setting see page 64 FINE U FINE Standard Mode when all the lamps are extinguished HALFTONE FINE U FINE Fine Mode HALFTONE FINE l OOO STANDARD For sending normal text and graphics oo PN S U FINE Ultra Fine M For sending norm
65. to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Department Code Setting Department Code operation is used to monitor the facsimile s activity when shared between multiple users or workgroups This feature is especially useful when billing departments based on machine usage When Department Code opera tion is enabled access to the facsimile is restricted to 99 valid department code passwords Each department code will be assigned a 5 digit department code password These pass words must be entered each time a user wishes to send a facsimile make copy print a de partment journal etc There are two types of Depart ment Codes Master and Indi vidual The Master Code is used as a supervisor level code to add delete and modify Indi vidual Codes The Master Code is also used to print the Department Code List and Master Journals that con tain all machine activity The Individual Codes are used to gain an access to basic ma chine functions and operations The Department Code can be used to print Journals which only show the activity under that code Display the S S 3 1 DEPARTMENT CODE 2 Enable Disable the Department Code Function 3 Enter the Maste M Department Name enu Press Enable or Disable the Depart If the Department Code function Department
66. you that the password is in correct Sending a Document to a Mailbox Remote Hub This section describes the pro cedures to send a document to a remote hub unit s Confidential Box or reserving a document to a Bulletin Board Box in a remote hub unit The remote hub unit must be compliant with ITU T F code communications For more information see page 137 NOTE The destination mailbox number must be setup in the remote hub unit prior to sending document 1 Load the Document 2 Display the MAILBOX Menu 3 Select the Mailbox Type 4 Select TX TO MAILBOX Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press ITU MAILBOX MAILBOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP Select the desired type of Mail box To send the document to a Confidential Box press Q CONFIDENTIAL 1 PRINT MAILBOX 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX To reserve the document to a Bulletin Board Box in a remote hub unit press BULLETIN BOARD IL PRINT 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX Select 2 TX TO MAILBOX by pressing i N TX CONFID
67. 2 14400BPS 3 9600BPS 4 4800BPS Select the desired speed To select OFF press To select 14400 BPS press To select 9600 BPS press To select 4800 BPS press 2 COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 F ER TEL NUMBER 4 Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods or you may designate another option at this point e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Dialing with Sub Address This function attaches a sub ad dress to the standard destina tion address in the event the re mote party requires one Three types of sub addresses can be used SUB SEP and PWD or any combination of two or three types can be used After selecting the desired types the transmission to follow will be sent to the desired ad dress using the designated sub address You can activate this option while programming an Abbrevi ated Dial Number page 70 or One Touch Dial Key page 77 if communication with a certain re mote party always requires this option If you activate this option using both the Abbreviated Dial Num ber or One Touch Dial Key setting and using this procedure for the same destination this operation will take precedence over the pre programmed set ting in Abbreviated Dial or One Touch D
68. 64 RESOIULON ee 64 Memory Transmission cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 91 Security TrANSMISSION ccceeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeaeeeteeeees 93 Delayed COMMUNICATIONS ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teas eeeeeeesecaeeeseaeeseeeeetsaaeeneaes 181 Use with Abbreviated Number registration eeseeeeeeeeeneeeeennnenn 73 Use with One Touch key registration 0 ccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 Delayed Polling Reception oo ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaes 181 Department Code Liew 163 Control Lists ec eeis ge Ge telnet eee Dee AEN De 217 ME UE Le EE 55 Maintenant aiana a iaaa I nance ven EEEN Leg 57 Department Control List 0 cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeesaaeeeeeneeeessaaeeseaes 217 Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation 0 0 0 0 eeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 25 Dial Ty EE 44 Dialing Methods AAA 97 Abbreviated Dialing sorasa aeaeaie eaae AAAA 98 Alphabet Dialing senie iaa aoe A a 99 Keypad Dialis ar a a a 100 On hook Dinge iasi anea EEN 117 One Touch Key Dialing 0 cececcececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseceeeeseneees 97 Direct Document Transmission ssssssseiessssssiisssetirrrsstirnrnnsstinnnnnntnennnnstnnn 103 Default Setting 2 cc eeeccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeeeseeeeeeeaaaeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeensnes 103 External Off hook Transmission sssseeeseeeeeeeesereenneesrnrsrrrsrerensrens 109 Of hook Transmissi
69. A New settings file is created Right click on the new settings file and select Load NOTE In order to create a user settings file to be saved on your hard disk refer to the section Saving the Device Configuration The Load settings screen appears Designate the hard disk location of the desired set file select the file then click on Open The set file is loaded Continue to Step 3c Browse Folders continued Changing the Device Configuration continued 3 Change the Device settings continued 3C Copy the device configuration L H a a ips ee D oe Left click and hold on the user settings file then drag it to the device settings file and release the left mouse button NOTE Initially your mouse pointer will become a circle with diagonal line Upon reaching the desired settings file the pointer will take the form of an address label Upon releasing the left mouse button the contents of the user settings file are copied to the device settings file Click the v button to download the new settings to your DP120F DP125F Back to Step 2a NOTE Click the X button to cancel adding editing the device configu ration Back to Step 2a Saving the Device Configuration The device setting file opened by TOSHIBA Viewer default name TOSHIBA is a temporary working file Every time TOSHIBA Viewer is opened the program accesses the attac
70. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST OT 01 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Function Key 00987654321 SUB 09876543210987654321 Press SEP 998877665544 PWD ww RK KK KKK KK KK KK TEL LIST BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOQRST ABB 001 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 PRINT 1234567 CL Chicago Group GROUP 0001 GREENVILLE OFFICE ABB 109 999999999 NEW YORK OFFICE ABB 900 333 912345678 I ec ara ee TELEPHONE NBRS LIST 1 BY NAME 2 ABB NUMBERS Names of Abbreviated 3 GROUP NUMBERS Dial Number One s Station Dial Number E Mail Address 4 ONE TOUCH NBRS Touch Key or Group e ae Number TM Alternate Dial Number SUB SEP or PWD Se Type of Sub address To select 1 BY NAME press OT tek desc One Touch Key Numbers ABB Abbreviated Dial Numbers Group Group Number Preset Dialing Number Lists continued Abbreviated Dial Number List ABBREVIATED TEL NUMBER LIST ABB NBR NAME PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 NAME TEL NUMBER E MAIL ADDRESS O01 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 TIME MONI BPS REPORT LINE MAILMODE 001 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQORST 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 23245 ON 144 ON 1 1234567 00987654321 SUB 12345678901234567890 SEP 112233445566 PWD AANEREN K E E K k AN 109 SE OFFICE 999999999 09 30 ORF 916 cr 333 914345678 Station Name Abbreviated Dial Number Stat
71. Abbreviated Dial When the correct number is dis ene ree SPEED DIAL Number 1 to 999 assigned to played press R ABB NUMBER 1 999 the desired party ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ O OO NOTE When an incorrect number is entered use to delete preceding digits or press STOP once to start over from the beginning Example of Abbreviated Dial Number 10 COMM RESERVATION ABB NUMBER 1 999 dy START KE The One Touch key or Abbrevi ated Dial Number and the name of the party will appear on the LCD display for about 2 sec onds Your facsimile will automatically start scanning the document into memory if enabled While scanning the facsimile dials connects and starts the trans mission ABB NBR 10 LONDON OFFICE Displayed for 2 second SCANNING TO MEMORY FILE NBR WEN RESIDUAL MEMORY 99 During scan to memory RESIDUAL MEMORY 99 During transmission NOTE When the number entered within the range of 1 through 999 is not preprogrammed with a specific party s fac simile or telephone number the message NUMBER NOT LISTED is displayed for 2 seconds and then the fac simile returns to the screen in Step 1 ABB NBR 10 NUMBER NOT LISTED Displayed for 2 seconds Alphabet Dialing 1 Press the SPEED Alphabet Dialing is used to
72. Address Entry 8 Enter the Facsimile Number Enter the required SEP address max 20 digits then press ENTER The display returns to the screen at the bottom of Step 2 You may continue from Step 3 and enter another sub address of a different type To complete your sub address entry select option 1 COMPLETE in step 3 SUB ADDRESS COMM EP MAX20 Hw Enter the required PWD max 20 digits then press ENTER The display returns to the screen at the bottom of Step 2 You may continue from Step 3 and enter another sub address of a different type To complete your sub address entry select option 1 COMPLETE in Step 3 SUB ADDRESS COMM PWD MAX20 When the sub address data has been entered the following is displayed COMM RESERVATION EMORY 100 UMBER RESIDUAL ENTER TEL Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods or you may designate another option at this point e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet This function attaches a cover sheet to the document to be transmitted or prints the cover sheet for confirmation purposes Prior to using this cover sheet feature the Cover Sheet func tion mus
73. Check the Scanner 3 Check the Top Cover TEST Menu Cover Press Open the Scanner Cover Open the Top Cover When its MENU SWITCH TEST OPEN SCANNER COVER When its open state is de tected the screen below ap pears After checking that the screen is displayed close the Scanner Cover Detects the open state of the Scanner Cover SWITCH TEST CLOSE SCANNER COVER Close the cover SWITCH TEST OPEN THE TOP COVER open state is detected the screen below appears After checking that the screen is dis played close the Top Cover Detects the open state of the Top Cover SWITCH TES CLOSE THE OP COVER Close the cover SWITCH TEST PULL OUT THE UPPER TRAY SWITCH TEST continued 4 Check the Upper Tray B Check the Process Unit Drum Unit with Developer Assembly Check the Bypass Tray If Installed Pull out the Upper Recording Paper Tray When the absence of a Recording Paper Tray is detected the screen below ap pears After checking that the screen is displayed install the Recording Paper Tray Detects the absence of an Upper Recording Pa per Tray SWITCH TEST INSERT THE TRAY UPPER Install the Recording Paper Tray SWITCH TEST PULL OUT THE UNIT PROCESS
74. Code NBR 01 is MENU GGG ENTRY DEPT CODE 1 YES 2 NO ment Code function 2 for YES Enable for NO Disable If YES is selected the follow ing Master Code Entry screen is displayed MASTER CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR 01 DEPT NAME MAX20 ES 2 seconds TER NAME DEPT NAME MAX20 The screen to enter the Master Department Name is displayed The data on the top row indi cates that it is in the Character Entry mode Continue to the fi nal step If NO is selected OPERA TION COMPLETED will be dis played has ever been set before the following screen is displayed To recover the Department DEPT CODE ENTRY 1 RECOVER OLD DATA 2 NEW Code data previously set press Q To set new Department codes press fixed as the Master Department Code Enter the Master Depart ment Name See page 36 if you need help selecting characters When the name is correctly dis played on the LCD display press ENTER The entered name is displayed on the bottom row MASTER CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR 01 ABC Master nDept es 2 seconds MASTER CODE ENTRY DEPT NBR QL MASTER CODE FERNE Department Code Setting continued 4 Enter the Master Department Code Password
75. Department No EX ECM with shortened bps Resolution Mode assigned to all com indicates the depart protocol 0 2400 8x3 85 MH munication jobs at the ment responsible for HW HR RDC communication H SE SE WE time of scanning this transmission job Ce is 2nd line communication 3 9600 l JBIG printed only when the 4 12000 16x15 4 Department Control 5 14400 option is ON 6 V 34 8 300dpi Transmission Reception Journal Communication Journal continued Manual Print Printing will JOURNAL start when is pressed with no document loaded in the Document Tray 1 Display the PRINT NUMBER Menu 2 Select the Option Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press JOURNAL PRINT NUMBER 121 50 CL PAGE 2 1 100 2 PAGES 3 1 150 3 PAGES Select one of the following op erations from the menu To print the 50 communication Journal press 2 To print the 100 communication Journal press To print the 150 communication Journal press Transmission Report This is the result report printed after a Direct Transmission a job transmitted directly from the document feeder instead of from memory TRANSMISSION REPORT Ge Printing Procedure PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBER1 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 Auto Print if pr
76. ITU MAILBOX MAILBOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP Select the desired type of Mail box To poll a document in a Confi dential Box press Q CONFIDENTIAL 1 PRINT MAILBOX 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX To poll a document in a Bulletin Board Box press BULLETIN BOARD 1 PRINT MAILBOX 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX Select 3 POLL FROM MAIL BOX by pressing Pa POLL CONFIDENTIAL BOX NUMBER MAX20 or r POLL BULLETIN BOARD BOX NUMBER MAX20 X Enter the Box Number max 20 digits Then press ENTER L If you are retrieving from a Confidential Box go to Step 5 If you are retrieving from a Bul letin Board Box go to Step 6 S POLL CONFIDENTIAL PASSWORD MAX20 or POLL BULLETIN BOARD ENTER TEL NUMBER SPEED DIAL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY Retrieving a Document from a Mailbox Remote Hub continued 5 Enter the Password 6 Dial the Remote Hub Unit d Complete the Procedure Enter the password to access the Confidential Box QQG 388 3 oi OKOLO Then press ENTER a POLL CONFID ENTER TEL N SPEED DIAL ONE TOUCH KEY ACE W E Enter the facsimile number of the remote hub unit usi
77. List Report Name list or report Printing Procedure TRANSMISSION JOURNAL Auto Print available if pro grammed see page 195 001 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXY2Z12345678901234 SCAN COUNT 1234 000004D2 PRINT COUNT 2345 00000929 DRUM COUNT 3456 00000D80 PAGE TIME TEL NUMBERI1 Your Station s ID Name TEL NUMBER2 Printing will automatically start whenever 150 transmis sions or 150 receptions are completed NAME NBR FILE NBR DATE TIME DURATION PGS TO DEPT NBR ACCOUNT MODE STATUS Manual Print always available 001 020 MAY 17 14 01 59 59 WER 1234567890 01 9999 G3 502 P NG 20 see page 196 i VERY IMPORTANT Up to date Activity Journals Dateand Tinie ihe must be maintained by the aan user In the event an elec j communication ion EDRR See See GE e e E Error Code tronic circuit board must be Ge ike ber Co is alternate SE GC D e oa order they took Length of each number or sub ad tion is ON and used S oe ap piles eeh B place transaction dress dial was used failure and Drum counters must be Minutes Seconds P Polling entered into the replacement SR R Relay Communication electronic circuit board This Ree Communication Mode SB Mailbox Communication information is listed at the z T top of every journal tst 2nd 3rd File No
78. Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL ME ENTER TEL ORY 100 UMBER Pick up the handset of the fac simile The unit is connected to the telephone line and you hear the dial tone through the speaker of the handset OFF HOOK TEL NUMBER Dial the facsimile number of the remote party using any of the four dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 NOTES e To use the Keypad Dial ing procedure on page 84 do not press the final START in this step e If an incorrect number is STOP dialed press Q and follow the instruction dis played on the LCD dis play to start the operation over Example of screen displayed while a number is entered using Keypad Dialing OFF HOOK TEL NUMBER 0559761234 Direct Transmission continued Off hook Transmission Optional Handset Dialing continued 4 Press the START Key When you hear the answering START tone press o If the remote party answers the phone you can inform the re mote party that you wish to send a document Upon hearing the facsimile tone press START EA Then replace the h
79. Mailbox ITU T F Code Communication List 00000000000aa0a 216 Power Failure List cneiiedaniieai iane iai ai i 225 Preset Dial Number Isi renais eyii r raiirii irera e i ieaiai 218 Abbreviated Dial Number Tei 220 leet Dee edd tenet ere EE ENEE 218 Group Number let 221 One Touch Number List eseseeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeseeennessrnsserr resen nne 222 Relay Box List EE 216 Relay Reception Isi 215 Relay Transmission End Terminal Report AAA 214 Relay Transmission Originator Report cccscceceseeeeeeseeeseseeeteeees 212 Relay Transmission Relay Station Report sseesseeeeeeeereseerereeene 213 Reservation Listesine tuii ee eee EEE EE ANE AA EET AAA 209 Transmission Report assssseesessreesssrnnensinnnneetnnnnnennennnentnnannnnnnnnnnnennnnnne 207 Transmission Reception Journal Communication Journal 205 Lists and Reports Settings ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeseeeeeessaeessaes 195 Communication Journal Settings ceeceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 195 Communication Report Settings ccccccceeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeesetaeeeeeeeees 195 Mailbox Communications Open Malo Zeg HO Bates Sant A aa a etnies te eee 137 COVEIVIOW ee eege deed nana ee 136 Reception List Settings c ccceccceececeeeeseeeeeececeeeseeeeeeeeaeeesscaeeneeees 205 M Mailbox TU TCompatblel 149 Cancelling a Document in a Mailbox Local Hub 161 Deleting a MailbOX riiseni eeni rai riar an
80. O01 CANCEL 2 RETAIN XX To CANCEL the existing link or One Touch assignment and re turn to Step 10a press To RETAIN the existing link or One Touch assignment and re turn to Step 10a press Returns to Step 10a ABB NBR 001 PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY TO ENTER OR ENTER TO SKIP One Touch Dialer Registration This facsimile provides a total of 73 One Touch Dial keys Keys 1 to 49 are accessible with the Flip Panel in the 01 49 view Keys 50 to 73 are accessible with the Flip Panel in the 50 73 view e Alternate Numbers If one of the primary fac simile numbers is busy and a 2nd facsimile is located at that same remote location the 2nd facsimile s telephone number can be programmed as an Alternate Number 1 Display the TEL LIST ENTRY Menu 2 Display the ONE TOUCH KEYS Menu 3 Select a One Touch Location 4 When a Preset One Touch is Active Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LIST ENTRY DIAL ENTRY 1 ABB NUMBERS 2 GROUP NUMBERS 3 ONE TOUCH KEYS To select ONE TOUCH KEYS press PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Press the desired One Touch key Example One Touch key 03 03 C If the One Touch key
81. See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 TEL NUMBER MAX128 ER The facsimile starts scanning the document into memory The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds be fore returning to the Standby Mode SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 231 RESIDUAL MEMORY 90 POLLING amp MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS The DP120F DP125F features advanced Polling and Mailbox functions designed to provide remote document retrieval capa bilities In addition the DP120F DP125F is a Hub type unit where documents can be stored and polled by other facsimiles with polling capabilities to re trieve documents from the DP120F DP125F Polling amp Mailbox Overview Polling Reservation Polling Reception Polling Reservation allows documents to be stored in the DP120F DP125F so that other facsimile machines can remotely retrieve Poll those documents Following types of polling reservations are available e Simple Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation using the facsimile s memory so that any facsimile with polling reception capabilities can remotely retrieve the document See page 138 Security Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation that requires a 4 digit security code to be entered prior to sending the document Security reservation is only available when communi cating with other TOSHIBA facsimil
82. TOUCH KEY Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 After each entry the selected facsimile is displayed for 2 sec onds PROG CONT POLL ONE TOUCH 24 PORTLAND PLANT Repeat this procedure until all remote facsimiles are entered PROG CONT POLL ENTER MORE OR PRESS START When all the remote facsimile locations have been entered in Step 6 press ENTER If the remote facsimile is a TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4 digit security code is pro grammed to the document to be polled go to Step 8 If the remote facsimile is not a TOSHIBA facsimile or no Secu rity Codes are in use press ENTER KH No Security Code will De se lected and the facsimile will re turn to the Standby Mode The facsimile will automatically start polling at the time set in this procedure Enter the 4 digit security code for the document to be re trieved ABC DEF GHI JKL PQRS TUV WXYZ Jo POLLING SECURITY CODE 11111 DEED When the 4 digit security code is entered press ENTER lt The procedure is now complete The display returns to the Standby Mode The facsimile will automatically start po
83. TX 1 ON 2 OEF Turn ON Security Transmission by pressing 9 COMM RESERVATION 2 ch Co IDUAL MEMORY 100 ENTER TEL NUMBER Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods or you may designate another option at this point e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 LISTS AND REPORTS LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS SETTING This facsimile allows the operator to set various options regarding the lists and reports listed below Reception Journal Settings JOURNAL 1 Display the 2 Select the Desired There are two types of Journals available on the DP120F DP125F Both the Transmission Journal TX JOURNAL Menu Option Journal and Reception Journal RX Journal list the 150 most recent transactions Journals can be JOURNAL printed either Automatically or Manually When manually printed C_ must be pressed To select the Press To configure the type of Journal JOURNAL MENU e JOURNAL type of Journal to print when C_ is pressed complete manual Journal printing discussed in this to print when jy used section press CFO COMMUNICATION REPORT Communication Report allows you to print a report after every transmission Reports can be printed automatically or manually When printing automatically you can de
84. Viewer GDI Printer from the Main TOSHIBA Viewer Dis play To create a GDI Printer refer to Changing the Device Configuration on page 270 The TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad is the viewer in corporated into TOSHIBA Viewer The UniPad can view the scanned image UniPad is opened _ Double click a scanned image 2 Select the DP120F DP125F Printer for Name AA AA A AAA A AA A A A A A AAA AAA yg es Ba Ps Pe ith ee AARAA AA KAAAARKAANAAAAAAAAANAAAAA AAAASAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAASAAAAAAAAAAANAAAA h A h ah ak al A A h A i A A RAA AA Select Print from File menu Continue general operation for printer properties and print settings Click OK The print job is sent to DP120F DP125F The scanned image is printed TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer continued Printing from Other Application You can also print a document from other applications using the TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer The procedure is the example with Windows NotePad The procedure may vary depending on the application _ Select Page Setup in File menu 3 Select DP120F DP125F Printer for Name H IEREHE U euwer GEE Pe late Uer eet S tep in Pile menu Ae A ial apriri b for Printer dl appears RPS Printer tor Hane p greeral operelian Por pe beter proeertlirs Win BoB P Srtup dlalag bk Set print spttiaus Click DR Page tetup diaisg Le claced amp Select Priag in File
85. a la seule condition que la somme d indices d quivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n exc de pas 5 OZONE SAFETY INFORMATION The ozone filter used with this machine complies with Environmental Protection Agency regulations for ozone emissions in an office environment This means that this facsimile does not produce hazardous ozone emissions greater than 0 1 ppm H D Replace the ozone filter Gri ee Aen SES NEE enti TE BeN 5 e r ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE DANGEREUX EN GAS D OUVERTURE ET LORSQUE LA S CURIT EST NEUTRALIS E VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG UBERBRUCKT NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN An ozone filter has been provided with this unit and is to be replaced at the same ZE WEE LET ACTING RACOMATTOMELLE LASERSMTEIOILE Ee i d Je E E E E H STRALEN interval as the drum unit See page 32 ABVARSEL 2 USYNLIG LACEASTOALNG NEA DENSE EE CUIDADO RADIACI N INVISIBLE DE LASER CUANDO LA CUBIERTA ESTA ABIERTAY LAS UNIONES EST N VENCIDAS EVITE EXPOSICI N A LOS RAYOS CUIDADO RADIA O INVISIVEL DE LASER QUANDO A TAMPA ESTA ABERTA E OS BLOQUEIOS TAPEADOS EVITE A EXPOSI O AOS RAIOS LASER SAFETY INFORMATION This facsimile is certified as a Class laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means th
86. a remote location s at a later time See page 181 Polling amp Mailbox Overview Continued Open Mailbox ITU T Compatible The Open Mailbox is a new international standard for mailbox communications Open Mailbox ITU T F code communications allows storage and retrieval of documents via mailboxes that comply with this standard The DP120F DP125F is a hub unit that has document storage capabilities so that ITU T F Code compliant remote units can retrieve documents from the DP120F DP125F Prior to utilizing Open Mailbox mailboxes must be created in the DP120F DP125F Following two types of Mailboxes are available e Confidential Box Confidential box allows a one time document retrieval from the mailbox Once a document is retrieved it is cleared If a new document is stored using the same box number where another document is already present it is added to the existing one It is possible to setup a password requirement for accessing the Confidential Box for document retrieval to prevent unauthorized re trieval of documents This password is used only when retrieving documents and not used during document reservation e Bulletin Board Box Bulletin Board box allows multiple document retrievals from the mailbox If a new document is stored using the same Box number where another document is already present it replaces the existing one It is possible to setup a password requirement for accessing the Bulletin Board Box for docu
87. ae ar y QOO MAILBOX GHI JKL MNO YO MAILBOX SETUP MAILBOX ENTER DELETE BOX NBR 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP 1 COMPLETE 2 BOX SETUP 3 BOX DELETE BOX NUMBER MAX20 Then press ENTER i If the entered Box number does not have a password pro grammed go to Step 6 If the entered Box number has a password programmed the screen below is displayed Go to Step 5 ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD MAX20 Deleting a Relay Box continued 5 Enter the Password 6 Complete the Procedure Enter the Password max 20 The following screen is dis played to indicate that the can 2 G cellation is accepted CANCELLED ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD MAX20 xxx Then press ENTER NOTE Make sure that the correct password is entered Other wise the machine will inform you that the password is in correct Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub This section describes the pro cedures to send a document to Relay Box in a remote hub unit The remote hub unit must be compliant with ITU T F code communications For more infor mation see page 126 NOTE The destination relay box must be setup in the remote hub unit prior to sending document 1 Load the Document 2 Display the MAILBOX Menu 3 Select the RELAY 4 Enter the Box Number
88. allow proper air flow to the unit s power supply 591 mm 23 3 inches Se ee ar eras 100 mm 3 9 inches es _ 4 612 mm 24 1 inches 794 mm 31 3 inches Height 635 mm 25 inches Top Cover open FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION Connecting Your TOSHIBA Facsimile Make sure that the Power Switch is turned OFF Connect the telephone line cord modular cord to the LINE1 connector Plug in the power cord as in the figure below Connect the external telephone set if desired to the PHONE connector Connect the optional Handset if equipped to the HANDSET connector NN II In Power Switch LINT ANOHd Ze Power Cord 13SANVYH 023 024 WARNING Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying the telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not
89. appear on the LCD display Documents are fed ob liquely i e skewed You have a machine er ror Check the display for an error message see pages 226 and 227 Clear the error There is no power to the facsimile You returned the handset before you pressed START the optional handset Make sure the power plug is plugged into the AC outlet and the power switch is ON Send the document again be START ing sure to press before returning the handset The modular cord the telephone line cable is not correctly connected Check the modular cord con nection between the wall socket and the facsimile The Dial Type setting of the facsimile is wrong Set the correct Dial Type in accordance with the line used for the facsimile see page 44 There is no dial tone or something else is wrong with the phone line The document is not set correctly in the Document Tray Try a voice call through the handset or the remote tele phone set Align the document guides properly but not too tightly The Scanner Cover is not closed fully Close the Scanner Cover until it clicks at the two latching po sitions Problem Cause Solution When document pag es are fed into the unit two pages are drawn into the slot The sending proce dure was completed but nothing was re corded on the record ing paper of the re ceiving party or the image was elongated Th
90. company s name facsimile telephone number and date amp time on the top of all transmitted documents This feature enables remote parties to easily identify your docu ments and the time of transmis sion To display the SETUP menu press MENU 1 LANGUAGE 2 DATE amp TIME 3 TERMINAL ID 4 DIAL TIPE NOTE Only 4 selections can be displayed at one time 1 Display the TERMINAL ID Menu 2 Enter the User ID 3 Select the International Code 4 Enter Your Telephone Number Highlight 3 TERMINAL ID using Ly or 4 and press ENTER H SET TERMINAL ID ID NAME MAX40 Displayed for 2 seconds y If the terminal ID is already set the current name is displayed on the last row ENTER NAME ID NAME MAX40 The new name will be displayed on the last row as it is entered Enter your user ID company name using the Keyboard and Numeric Keypad You can use up to 40 characters For more information on select ing characters see page 34 Character Entry When your ID name is displayed correctly on the LCD display press ENTER lt CL Your facsimile will prompt you for your telephone number s in ternational code INT CODE 1 ADD 2 NOT NEEDED If you send documents over seas adding your International Code country code to your store
91. display will return to the Standby Mode in about 60 seconds if no keys are pressed RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Setting the Page Count When this function is set to ON the designated number of pages will be printed at the top of the recording paper at the remote station This function is effective for a Direct Document Trans mission only The total number of pages will be printed auto matically as part of the TTI in Memory Transmissions This setting is very helpful for confirming that all of the pages loaded into the feeder have been successfully sent It will also assist the recipient to track the number of pages as it will add a page count to a the TTI at the top of your transmit ted pages e 1 5 2 5 3 5 etc The facsimile will compare the number of pages actually sent with the number you entered 1 Load the Document 2 Display the PAGE NUMBER Menu 3 Enter the Number of Document Pages 4 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AAY 17 00 WED11 13 RE
92. ees The reit ink Is wnt fo BIE PPS Page Setup dialog appears 2 Click Printer Page Setup for Printer dialog appears Page Teng He Fma Gee Hms oe Tote Terhis CPi KAL uT Cred SC Cancel Ckick Properties for general operation for printer properties Printer properties dialog appears Lesen HIEN Ga pe geri Be pes e See mg Lean F Pma La sm Sai Hous Cast Ce vg E Click OK Click OK on Page Setup for Printer dialog Back to Page Setup dialog TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer continued Printing from Other Application continued 4 Set print settings DN Select Print in File menu Se ge pi Ep pmm ep P ER H TESHIRS iiewer GPI Pr leter S H Surer ibi Setup in File menu E Noe diilin appears ens ee en ve mEn Pimi I r E Paga SE for Printer dislog appears i pr GPS Printer fer Mane Eesen P greeral operealian for priali progertirs l En 1 mam i o in E ta Paje Setup diaiag kh See print spttiaus E k OF Page Setup diaig Le clase oi i I uy fens OS A amp Select Prist in File seau The Pint ivb is sent ta BIDRA AP Click OK The print job is sent to DP120F DP125F Page Setup dialog is closed The document is printed INDEX A Abbreviated Number Abbreviated Dial Number Tei nl EE e N aed ava ui a adnan eaas Communications Options ssesssseseessineeeeetttttisttistiinssrnn
93. is located at that same remote location the 2nd facsimiles telephone number can be programmed as an Alternate Number Important Note The total number of available locations will vary depending upon the amount of informa tion stored in each location 1 Display the TEL LIST ENTRY Menu 2 Display the ABB NUMBERS Menu 3 Enter an ABB Dial Number Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LIST ENTRY TEL LIST ENTRY 1 ABB NUMBERS 2 GROUP NUMBERS 3 ONE TOUCH KEYS To select ABB NUMBERS press ENTER ABB NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Upon entering the first number ABB NUMBER ENTRY ABB NUMBER 1 999 Enter an Abbreviated Dial Num ber from 1 to 999 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV Make sure the 3 digit number 001 to 999 appears correctly then press WXYZ ENTER lt NOTE Any leading zero 0 can be omitted from the Abbreviated Dial Number If the ABB Dial Number you en tered has not been previously registered the screen below will be displayed Skip to Step 6 If the ABB Dial Number you en tered has been previously regis tered continue to the next step ABB NBR 001 ID NAME MAX20 e 2 seconds ENTER NAME ID NAME MAX20
94. is not displayed on the facsimile s LCD display NOTE When the External Tele phone is in the off hook sta tus i e while EXTERNAL OFF HOOK is displayed the Dial Keypad on the fac simile does not accept any key entry When you hear the answering START the facsimile If the remote party answers the phone you can inform the remote party that you wish to send a document Upon hearing the facsimile tone press START Ls Then replace the handset of the External Telephone When the transmission is com pleted the facsimile returns to the Standby Mode MAY 17 00 WED11 54 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 Redialing Automatic Redialing Manual Redialing Direct Transmission When the line of the remote party is busy the facsimile will automatically redial the remote party up to the set number of times with intervals of the set length see page 67 If the line is not connected after the set number of redialing at tempts the facsimile will record a LINE BUSY error Confirm the facsimile number of the remote party and repeat the transmission procedure This function enables you to re dial the number last dialed us ing this facsimile to transmit a document WARNING STOP If you press el the fac simile will clear the facsimile number registered and lose the manual redial capability NOTE This feature will not function with numbers dial
95. line to use Line 1 or Line 2 for this Abbreviated Dial Number by pressing EL LINE SELECT T 1 FIRST AVAILABLE 2 LINE 1 3 LINE 2 To allow the Line to be selected automatically press 2 To designate Line 1 press To desingnate Line 2 press Returns to Step 9 COMM OPTIONS 2 DELAYED COMM 3 TX REOIRT To assign this Abbreviated Dial Number to a One Touch Key press the desired One Touch Key Example One Touch Key 01 01 ABB NBR 001 ONE TOUCH 01 L A OFFICE REGISTERED e ENTER ABB NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Returns to Step 2 STOP Press to exit the Menu Operation mode and return to the Standby Mode DA e 2 seconds If the desired One Touch Key has been previously linked to another Abbreviated Dial Num ber or preset with a separate One Touch number one of the following screens will be dis played One Touch key has been as signed to an Abbreviated Num ber ONE TOUCH 01 ALREADY ASSIGNED ABB NBR 003 SMITH S OFFICE One Touch key has been as signed with an Individual Phone Number e ONE TOUCH Di ALREADY ASSIGNED ONE TOUCH 01 WEST REGION CENTER XX E E 2 seconds Va ONE TOUCH
96. minimums As with The TOSHIBA Viewer system is compatible with Microsoft Windows 95 98 Microsoft Windows NT4 0 or later most Windows applications Make sure that your computer meets the following criteria TOSHIBA Viewer will run faster when used on a PC For installation under Microsoft Windows 95 98 or Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 with a faster processor or with more RAM If you are PC IBM PC or 100 compatible Pentium 120 MHz or higher using other applications on Operating system Microsoft Windows 95 98 Windows NT 4 0 your PC at the same time Ka WE f as TOSHIBA Viewer a fast PC memory 32M Bytes minimum 64M Bytes recommended for Windows 95 98 First Edition Microsoft Windows 95 er processor and additional OSR1 Service Pack 1 is recommended RAM are highly recommend 32M Bytes minimum 64M Bytes recommended for Windows 98 Second Edition and Windows NT 4 0 ed When using Windows NT4 0 please ensure that Microsoft NT4 0 Service Pack 4 or later is installed Display A 24 bit color video card and driver is recommended Configuration of the CD ROM The configuration of the CD ROM and the purposes for each folder are as described below e Toshiba Viewer Includes the Setup exe to install the TOSHIBA Viewer printer driver and TWAIN driver Drivers9x Network Printer Includes the printer driver for the client computers of Windows 95 98 Drivers9x PnP Printer amp TWAIN Includes the printer driver and TWAIN drive
97. number QOG GGG PQRS Tuv WXYZ EE 2 The PIN number entered is masked with displayed on the LCD display When the entry is complete START press O COMM RESERVATION TEL NUMBER MAX 128 17145551212 E Disabling ECM Temporarily If the ECM default setting is set to ON it is always effective for communications on your facsim ile You can turn ECM OFF for a single transmission using this procedure The facsimile will au tomatically return to its default status immediately after that transmission is complete NOTE If ECM is set to OFF in the default setting procedure this procedure is not appli cable and the facsimile will warn you with an error mes sage NOT ALLOWED NOW 1 Display the SET ECM Menu 2 Select the ECM Option Press MENU E E SET ECM ESON 2 OFF Select 2 0FF by pressing The following screen is dis played You may dial the remote facsimile for your communica tion job The display will return to the Standby Mode in about 60 seconds if no keys are pressed COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS Privileged Reception This function prevents your fac simile from receiving docu ments from unknown parties Transmissions to the DP120F DP125F are only possible when the
98. period for reception If any data is already set it is dis played on the bottom row RECEPTION ONLY TIME PERIOD ffe 00 00 Enter the start time and end time of the time period in which the Line 2 will be used for re ception only NOTES For 24 hour format 00 00 to 23 59 For 12 hour format 12 00 to 11 59 and the AM or PM designation When the correct time period is entered press ENTER lt OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode BASIC FUNCTIONS AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE DIALING Abbreviated Dialer Registration Once registered 73 One Touch and 300 Abbreviated Dial Num bers will allow you to send docu ments or make telephone calls to 373 frequently called numbers without manually dialing the en tire number Abbreviated Dial Numbers This machine can store up to 300 16 digit facsimile num bers and associated 20 char acter location ID names This information is stored into Ab breviated Dial Numbers la beled from 001 to 999 One Touch Numbers See page 77 Alternate Numbers If one of the primary facsimile numbers is busy and a 2nd facsimile
99. pressed GHI QG numeric characters JKI E MNO TUN OO z AOE 2 I SHIFT BACKSPACE ALTERNATE _ SPACE SPACE e BACKSPACE 50 73 01 49 Provides the user inferface for entering alpha and special characters Key ALTERNATE key SHIFT key ajaaaaaawai AAAAAAAAA ci c ccc did ep el c EEEEEEE gig G ihitai III itr ELL nian NNN I SEN 00006966 SIE RR s RSSS titt TT ujduaudd vuoutG VIN I z KEE Character Entry continued Character Correction Replacing Characters Inserting Characters Using O position the cursor over the charac Using Q position the cursor over the point NEW YORK ter to be corrected NEW YK of insertion and press INSERT Q Enter the desired character The message INSERT is displayed on the second row INSERT NEW YORK NEW Bir Deleting Characters Enter the desired character s O in this example The character s will be inserted without deleting ENTER Using position the cursor over the charac NEW Y RK other characters in the line Press C_
100. scanner then automatically attach it to an email message Setup This takes you to a dialog where settings on your DP120F DP125F can be configured from the PC it may also allow you to exchange Phonebook contacts with your DP120F DP125F s One Touch or Speed Dial functions Help To access TOSHIBA Viewer on line Help Exit To close TOSHIBA Viewer Browse Folders When you click Browse Folders button or the TOSHIBA Viewer logo on the Welcome menu the TOSHIBA Viewer main display will appear NOTE e When you close the main TOSHIBA View er display the Wel come menu will reap pear If you prefer to skip the Welcome menu select Pro gram from the Setup menu click on the Ap plication tab and un check the Show wel come screen option then click OK The Welcome menu will not to be displayed be ginning with the next time you start TOSHIBA Viewer You can switch be tween open folders in the main TOSHIBA Viewer display using Ctrl TAB or Cirl F6 You can close the cur rent folder in the main TOSHIBA Viewer dis play using Ctrl F4 At the top of the Main TOSHIBA Viewer Display is the menu list File Edit View Message Setup Window and Help Below the menu list is the main toolbar Open Print Acquire and Find For further descrip tions of the each menu item select Contents and Index in Help menu to view the Help The remainder of the screen is divided into two parts e On the left is t
101. see Lists And Reports Settings Reception Settings Discar TT 114 Multi Copy Setting AAA 116 e 113 Reverse Order Printing Setting cccceeeeececeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeesenaeeetenes 115 Recording Paper dE CTIE te EE 20 Paper Size Adjustment s essseeessseeeeneeireestrtttittttnsssrnnssrnssnnnsnnnne 22 Paper Size Recording Area 113 Trays OPTION ssie oenen aaan eaa anaa a eana AAE naaa ET LAEE 12 Recovery Transmission SEWING daa e a a a EE 168 Transmitting Sending cceeececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeseneeessaeeeeeneees 169 Redang E 110 Automatic Redialing A 110 Manual Redialing Direct Transmissions 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory ce cceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeetnteeeeeeees 111 Redial Interval and Counter Setting c cccssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeteeees 67 Telephone Handset Operation Optional 117 Reduction see Reception Settings Relay Transmission Deleting a Relay Box 0 eeeeecceceeeeeennneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeneeaas 132 EE 126 Relay Box hist rte ege hast earl idee Gatti ae 216 Relay Destination Report Setting ceceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeneeessteeeteeees 203 Relay Reception List REENEN 215 Relay Reception List Setting ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesstaeeteeees 204 Relay Station Transmission Report Setting cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 202 Relay Transmission End Terminal Report AAA Relay
102. selected a Paper Tray for the Separa tor Page function this set ting is not available When the specified Paper Tray becomes empty the paper will be supplied from another Paper Tray 1 Display the LETTER HEAD PAPER Menu 2 Select the Tray Option Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU GGG LETTER HEAD PAPER 1 0OFF 2 BYPASS 3 UPPER TRAY 4 MIDDLE TRAY 5 LOWER TRAY If no Option Recording Paper Tray is installed the following screen is displayed SORRY NOT POSSIBLE When one Optional Recording Paper Tray is installed To select press the Bypass Tray To select the Upper Recording Paper Tray press To select the Lower Recording Paper Tray press OPERATION COMPLE 4H el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen When two Optional Recording Paper Trays are installed To select the Bypass Tray press To select the Upper Recording Paper Tray press To select the Middle Recording Paper Tray press To select the Lower Recording Paper Tray press OPERATION COMPLE H oO Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press
103. the Devices folder on the left side of the main TOSHIBA Viewer display Open these folders to review the contents of the DP120F DP125F s mailboxes and drop items into these folders to download items to the mailboxes Scanning with your DP120F DP125F or other TWAIN compatible scanner You can use your DP120F DP125F to scan hard copy documents into any TWAIN compatible application you are run ning e g PaintShop Pro Corel Photo Paint etc File Scan also provides a function that allows you to build a multi page docu ment from several sepa rate TWAIN scans This is useful if you want to scan different pages with different settings or if you want scan both sides of a document NOTE You can also operate the scan from the Main TOSHIBA Viewer Dis play However it is not allowed you to re build a multi page document Set the hard copies to be scanned in the document tray before scanning NOTE e Before scanning you can preview the scan ning document by clicking Preview When you use the other TWAIN compatible appli cations to scan the scanner settings dialog appears _ Click File Scan on Main Welcome Menu 3 Click Scan Click Select source Select Source dialog appears The scanner setting dialog appears 2 Select the TWAIN Scanner 4 Set the scanner settings Select Source E TWAIN Toshiba DP120F DP125F 0 0 Y Cancel Help
104. the desired position using the following keys Get When the desired value is dis played on the LCD display press ENTER om OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other volume settings referring to their associated pages for instructions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Key Touch Tone Volume Adjustment The key touch tone volume can be adjusted using the following procedure 1 Display the KEY TOUCH VOLUME Menu 2 Enter the Desired Volume Value Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU O 4 The current setting is highlight ed on the bottom row SET KEY TOUCH VOLUME VOLUME 0 7 0123B567 Enter the desired volume value 0 to 7 O for minimum 7 for maximum or Move the cursor to the desired position using the following keys Get When the desired value is dis played on the LCD display press ENTER LC OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other volume settings referring to their associated pages for instructions or press
105. the opera TOR This way you will know how many 3 second pauses will be required tion using first Load the Document 2 Display the CHAIN DIAL COMM Menu 3 Enter the Dial Number 4 Press the START Key Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AAY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press CHAIN DIAL COMM CL CHAIN DIAL COMM ENTER TEL NUMBER SPEED DIAL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY Start constructing your dialing sequence using any of the fol lowing dialing methods You may use them consecutively un til your entire dialing string has been entered After each entry sequence the LCD screen dis plays the screen shown is step 2 e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 REDIAL C Pause Signal PAUSE When all the required entries are made press START D The facsimile starts scanning the document into memory dis playing the screen shown be low When document scanning is complete the display returns to the Standby Mode SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 108 R
106. the system configuration file contained within the software product at the time of purchase plus the number of users and devices added by obtaining a valid licensed upgrade from Wordcraft International Limited or an authorised agent of Wordcraft International Limited USES NOT PERMITTED a Downloading of the software from a computer service or bulletin board or use in a multi site arrangement except in respect of users licensed by Wordcraft International Limited to do so b Use of the software in a computer service business network time sharing interactive cable television or multiple CPU arrangement except in respect of users licensed by Wordcraft International Limited to do so c The use of a single user version on a second or subsequent computer or network workstation Details of multi user packs are available from authorised dealers or authorised distributors of Wordcraft International Limited or direct from Wordcraft International Limited d The use of a network version on a second or subsequent network e The making of alterations and modifications to the software merging all or any part of the software with another program reverse engineering decompiling or disassembling of the software f The right to rent assign lease transfer or grant sub licences or other rights to others g The making of copies of any documentation belonging to Wordcraft International Limited h The selling or transferring of software marked Not for Resal
107. their associated pages for in sion Report whenever a docu i struction or press ment is transmitted press To print the report normally ress D p STOP To only print a Transmission Re NOTES port when an error has occurred e To print the report on Ap to exit the Report Setting mode press size paper the A5 size and return to the Standby Mode paper must be loaded to S the Bypass Tray option for DP120F in portrait and the recording paper F To turn OFF automatic printing of size must also be set to Transmission Reports press OTHERS 0 e If no paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray the re SET TX REPORT 1 ALWAYS 2 ON ERROR 3 0FF A5 SIZE PRINT 1 0ON port will be printed from another tray The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COMPLE H el Memory Transmission Report Setting 1 ENEE 2 Select the Option for 3 Set the Option for 4 Select the Option for A5 SIZE PRINT REPORT Menu Memory TX First Page Image Press Select the desired printing option To print a first page image of the To reduce the report size and After completing the Memory MENU OHOHOHOHORG SET MEMORY TX REPORT 1 ALWAYS 2 ON ERROR 3 0FF for single location memory trans missions To ALWAYS print a Transmis sion Report whenever a docu ment is transmitted pre
108. to the remote facsimile num ber for routing or security see page 185 PCL PRINT Used to set the functions related to the PCL Board when the optional GA 1020 PCL Print Kit is in stalled JOURNAL Used to print a communication journal see page 195 PREV TX RPT Displays or prints the result of previous transmission jobs see page 120 RESERVATION LIST Prints a Job Reservation List see page 209 SECURE RX Enables or disables Secure RX see page 179 CHECK E MAIL Used to receive an E mail immediately Requires optional GD 1040 Internet FAX Kit and GF 1010 NIC Kit be installed TEL LINE SELECT Designates a specific telephone line for the current transmission see page 189 TEL LIST ENTRY Used to register Abbreviated One Touch Group and Relay Group Dialing numbers see pages 70 77 and 83 TEL LIST PRINT Prints desired telephone facsimile lists see page 218 CONTRAST Selects the desired contrast level of transmit docu ments see page 90 SETUP UNPACKING 1 Unpack the Carton 2 Make sure All Items are Enclosed This hardware has been designed to be installed by an Packing List authorized TOSHIBA service representative AR ACSIMNG aos eege ithe teada sales 1 10 Warranty Ca 1 Check the carton and report any damage to the delivery 2 Phone Line Cord Modular Cord
109. use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Recording Paper Exit Tray Document Exit Tray Charger Cleaner Mylar Scraper Recording Paper Exit Tray Installation Document Exit Tray Installation Charger Cleaner and Mylar Scraper Installation Charger Cleaner 028 Place the hooks of the Record ing Paper Exit Tray into the slots on the left side of the unit e Do not place heavy objects on the Recording Paper Exit Tray or apply strong force Fit the tabs of the Document Exit Tray into the slots on the left side of the unit e Do not place heavy objects on the Document Exit Tray or apply strong force e Extend the Document Exit Tray Extension for long doc uments Open the top cover Store the Charger Cleaner and Mylar Scraper in the location provided in the rear inner cover of the facsimile as shown in the figure NOTE The Charger Cleaner and Mylar Scraper are used when cleaning the Drum Unit and Developer Assembly See pages 238 and 239 INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION Recording Paper Installation About Recording Paper e Use only recommended paper brands to optimize your fac simile performance Contact your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for more information Remove the recording paper when storing or relocating your facsimile Avoid using damaged folded or misaligned recording paper Us
110. when performing a full memory clear or upgrading the machine firmware because you can easily re program the machine s phonebook by downloading the stored phonebook file 1 Open the Device folder 2 Create the new phonebook file amp c Setup device phonebook amp Devicename Status EEn Select the device and click the Setup device phonebook button Reading data from device appears as Viewer interrogates the attached facsimile Toshiba Phonebook Setup appears Double click on Add settings file A New settings file is created Enter an appropriate name for the new settings file To copy the current device phonebook settings to the new settings file left click and hold on the device phonebook file e g TOSHIBA then drag it to the new settings file e g LA Office Phonebook and release the left mouse button NOTE Initially your mouse pointer will become a circle with diagonal line Upon reaching the desired phonebook file the pointer will take the form of an address label Upon releasing the left mouse button the contents of the device phonebook file are copied to the new phonebook file To save the new settings within TOSHIBA Viewer go to Step 3a To save the new phonebook as a file on your local hard disk go to Step 3b Saving the Phonebook continued Browse Folders continued 3 Save new phonebook
111. 0012 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST OT 01 02 ABB 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 UNSUCCESSFUL SENT PAGES GROUP NUMBER 0014 AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ OT 03 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG 01 ABB 011 123 45678901234567890123456789 14 012 SEATTLE PLANT 09 Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was not completed SENT PAGES Number of pages sent normally Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was performed successfully Group Number Relay Station Name or Number End Terminal One Touch or Abbreviated Dial Numbers NOTE The format sample above is obtained when a Relay Transmission was performed with Group designations When a Relay Transmission is performed with individual designations the Group Number print is skipped Relay Reception List The list is output on the Relay Station upon receiving a relay request Printing Procedure RELAY RECEPTION LIST PAGE gt 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 Auto Print if programmed see TEL NUMBER1 12345678901234567890 age 204 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 pag R NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXY2Z12345678901234 WER 5 gt Printing will automatically FILE NUMBER 045 start upon receiving a re quest to perform a relay op DATE MAY 17 20 31 eration GROUP NUMBER 00001 0002 0003 0004 7 DOCUMENT PAGES eel FROM 1234567890123456789 7 File Number assigned by the Relay Station when the Relay request is rec
112. 02 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 OT 02 05 ABB NUMBER 014 HONG KONG OFFICE TEL NUMBER 1234567890123456789 UNSUCCESSFUL SENT PAGES GROUP NUMBER 0002 AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ OT 33 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG 01 Receiver where an error occurred SENT PAGES Number of pages sent normally Receiver where the transmission was completed normally This is the result report printed after a Multi polling Reception Printing Procedure Auto Print if programmed see page 200 Printing will automatically start after all polling opera tions have been completed successfully or unsuccess fully Relay Transmission Originator Report RELAY TX ORIGINATOR TERMINAL REPORT FILE NUMBER DATE DOCUMENT PAGES START TIME END TIME SUCCESSFUL GROUP NUMBER 009 MAY 17 10 55 15 MAY 17 10 56 MAY 17 14 18 PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 NAME 001 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 RECOVERY TIME MAY 17 14 10 0012 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST OT DI 02 ABB 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 UNSUCCESSFUL SENT PAGES GROUP NUMBER 0014 AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ OT 03 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG 01 ABB 011 123 45678901234567890123456789 14 012 SEATTLE PLANT 09 Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was not completed SENT PAGES Number of pages sent normally Each Relay Group to which t
113. 2 DEPARTMENT 3 ITU MAILBOX 3333 ABB 001 OT 01 OT 01 GROUP 0001 Then to select 3 ITU MAIL BOX press Box No End station Number to send Relay 3 Transmission Report Department Control List Available only when the Department Control Mode option is selected DEPARTMENT CODE LIST PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 001 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 DEPT NBR NAME DEPT CODE TX PGS RX PGS COPY PGS EMAILS SENT 01 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQORST 12345 123456 123456 123456 123456 02 OPERATION CENTER 82615 296541 12104 99999 2345 14 SYSTEM DESIGN 12131 88888 88887 988886 4321 15 XYZ 33151 6543 12109 450 1324 20 99990 4 7 6 Department Name Department Code Department for operating the i izi No department Sent Received Copied E Mali send Accumulated number of pages operated by the department NOTE The list shown is produced when the Master code 01 is used to initiate the print list operation If a user code 02 99 is used only the data relating to that department will be printed Issues a list of Department Codes and data processed for the Department Control Mode Printing Procedure To display the main menu press MENU 1 COMM OPTIONS 2 LISTS 3 INITIAL SETUP 4 DEFAULT SETTINGS J To select 2 LISTS press 1 FUNCTION 2 DEPAR
114. 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX Select 1 PRINT MAILBOX by pressing PRT CONFIDENTIAL BOX NUMBER MAX20 pe A or PRT BULLETIN BOARD BOX NUMBER MAX20 XX By Enter the Box Number max 20 digits gt D bi DEF GHI GG OG PQRS TUV WXYZ C Git Then press ENTER lt i If you are printing from a Confi dential Box go to Step 5 If you are printing from a Bulle tin Board Box go to Step 6 PRT CONFIDENTIAL PASSWORD MAX20 Printing a Document from a Mailbox Local Hub continued DN Enter the Password 6 Complete the Procedure Enter the password to access The facsimile starts printing the the Confidential Box document The following screen is displayed during the printing sequence before returning to O 2 3 the Standby Mode MAY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 80 0 PRINTING Then press ENTER L Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox Local Hub This section describes the pro cedure to cancel the docu ments stored in the DP120F DP125F This operation will erase all existing documents in each Mailbox but not erase the Mailbox itself 1 Display the 2 Select the Mailbox 3 Select CANCEL 4 Enter the Box MAILBOX Menu Type MAILBOX Number Turn the Flip Pa
115. 2 status in Step 1 displayed you can ei ther continue or cancel the job To continue wait for the fac simile to return to the Standby STOP Mode or press ol To cancel and erase the dis played job press JOB CANCEL CANCEL FILE NBR 999 2 NO Press one of the following keys To cancel the job press Q To continue without cancelling the job press Display amp Print Transmission Report You can display the last 150 transmissions on the LCD You can also print out the report of the displayed job 1 Display the PREVIEW TX REPORT Menu 2 Select the Job 3 Printing a Job Status With the Standby Mode screen displayed select the direct func tion access view on the opera tion panel Press PREV TX RPT PREVIEW TX REPORT COPY PRINT REPORT T PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREE The last transmission job is dis played as in the screen below Use your EE keys to scroll to the desired job Previous Job Report Screen ol Tu FILE NBR 123 REDFIELD EX MAY 29 23 25 OK xx Ih Next Job Report Screen If you want to print a report of the displayed job press COPY The facsimile prints a TRANS MISSION REPORT MAY 17 00 WED12 43 RESIDUAL MEMORY 80 PRINTING LIST Communication Journal A Communication Journ
116. 3 Start Redialing Press REDIAL PAUSE ENTER START T PREVIOUS SCREEN J NEXT SCREEN e If there are no jobs to be redialed the screen below is displayed for 2 seconds then the facsimile returns to the Standby Mode REDIAL NUMBER NOT LISTED Wait 5 seconds or press any key on the Operation Panel ex STOP cept to display the screen on the right Screen Index 1stline Type of job 2nd line Destination of redialing 3rd line Date amp Time of job accepted 4th line File Number Locate the screen of the desired job using the following scroll keys MENU for the previous screen for the next screen SINGLI L A E TRANSMIT OFFICE MAY 17 00 FILE 135933 BR 121 Djl t SINGLI E TRANSMIT SEATTLE FACTORY MAY 17 00 FILE 13256 BR 123 SNe SINGLI L A MAY 17 00 FILE E TRANSMIT OFFICE D 14 03 BR 124 When the desired job is dis played press ENTER lt The facsimile starts to dial the number for a transmission MAY 17 00 WED14 05 RESIDUAL MEMORY 75 RECEIVING Automatic Receiving Mode Auto Reception is the ability of the facsimile to receive docu ments sent to your facsimile au tomatically The facsimile starts to receive a document after a pre
117. 38 Language Selection ccccceesceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeesaeeeneeeeeesnaaeeee 39 Date and Time Setting 22 0 ceccccceneeeeeeeceteeaeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeees 40 Terminal ID Setting cccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaaaeeseeeeeseaeeessaeeeseaes 42 Dial Type SettinG EE 44 DEVICE CONFIGURATION ccceeesesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 Configuration Gummarm 0 ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseaaeeseceeeesaeeesenaeeeteneees 45 Bell Ringer Volume Adjustment 0 eee cece eee ennneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaaees 47 Alarm Tone Volume Adjustment AAA 48 Key Touch Tone Volume Adhusimenmt AA 49 Monitor Volume Adjustment AA 50 Power Saver Operation 51 Setting Separator Page ccccecesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeseaeeesecaeeeeeneees 53 Department Code Setting AA 55 Department Code Maintenance ssesseseeesseeeeieesiiessirrssrnesrnrnrrnnnsre 57 euni 58 Print Density Setting ce eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaee eens eeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeees 59 Document Length Setting 0 cceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeeeeeenaaeeees 60 Bue ie 61 Receive Interval Setting c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeneeeesaaeeee 62 ECM Default Setting c cceecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeeeeeeesiaeetee 63 Default Setting for Document Mode Resolution and Contrast 64 Collate Copy Setting EE 65
118. 4 digit or 2 digit format for the year and 24 hour or the 12 hour format for the time 3 TERMINAL ID FCC MANDATORY Page 42 Sets the Terminal ID Company Name amp Facsimile Number for your machine 4 DIAL TYPE Page 44 Configures your machine for use with Touch Tone MF or Rotary Dial DP telephone service NOTE indicates the factory default setting Language Selection You can select the language used on the LCD display and all reports printed by your facsimile English French and Spanish are available To display the SETUP menu press MENU 1 LANGUAGE 2 DATE amp TIME 3 TERMINAL ID 4 DIAL TIPE NOTE Only 4 selections can be displayed at one time 1 Display the LANGUAGE Menu 2 Select the Desired Language 3 Select Another SETUP Item or Highlight 1 LANGUAGE using Zei or 4 and press ENTER or LANGUAGE 01 ENGLISH 02 1 ESPANOL 03 FRANCAIS Select the desired language 09 for ENGLISH DW for SPANISH C3 for FRENCH OPERATION COMPLE E el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to th
119. 42 Assembly Developer Grasp the Top Cover Release Lever to open the Top Cover Hold the Developer Assembly with both hands and shake the cartridge back and forth several times Holding the Developer Assem bly with one hand grasp the end of the protective strip under the Toner Cartridge Pull the strip firmly to completely remove it from the Toner Cartridge e The sealing film will contain a small amount of toner on its surface Carefully dispose of the film in an appropriate waste re ceptacle to avoid soiling items it may come in contact with Attach the Drum Unit to the De veloper Assembly Position the Drum Unit with the green Drum surface facing the Toner Roller on the Developer Assembly IMPORTANT e Never touch the photo conductive drum the green surface of the Drum Unit If the surface is scarred or scratched it will cause print quality problems e Do not expose the photo conductive drum of the Drum Unit to light for more than 3 minutes If the Drum Unit is to be left anywhere outside the fac simile be certain to cover it with cloth paper etc Install the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit attached into the machine Holding the Developer Assem bly by the green handles align the three shafts on the Devel oper Assembly sides with the slots in the machine frame Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation continued 6 Press Down on the 7 Close th
120. 999 if Then press ENTER lt GROUP NBR 0001 GROUP NAME MAX20 Displayed for 2 seconds The display changes to the fol lowing for character entry go to Step 5 ENTER NAME GROUP NAME MAX20 If the number entered is already registered as a Group Number you will receive an LCD prompt like the one below GROUP NBR ENTRY ALREADY ASSIGNED GROUP NBR OREGON GRP Lane 2 seconds 0001 f GROUP NBR ENTRY 2 MODIFY 3 RETAIN J To select 1 CANCEL go to Step 4a To select 2 MODIFY go to Step 4b To select 3 RETAIN go to Step 4c Group Number Registration continued 4a Cancel the Existing Group 4hb Modify the Existing Group 4c Retain the Existing Group D Enter the Group Name Enter a Remote Station To cancel the existing Group press to CANCEL GROUP NBR ENTRY GROUP NBR CANCELLED 0001 Bi e 2 seconds ENTER GROUP NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Return to Step 3 To change the existing Group press to MODIFY Go to Step 5 for the Group Name entry GROUP NBR 0001 GROUP NAME MAX20 A Ater 2 seconds ENTER NAME GROUP NAME MAX20 COLORADO GRP de A The curr
121. A Aar E ai 151 Deleting Documents eini ei i a aaa 161 MADOX EE 216 OVEIVIOW eet ege we esl eae ee ae ins E a ee 136 Printing a Document from a Mailbox Local Hub 159 Reserving a Document to a Mailbox Local Hub 155 Retrieving Polling a Document from a Mailbox Remote Hub 157 Sending a Document to a Mailbox Remote Hub 153 Setting Up a MailboX eeccececeeceececeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseneeeeeaeees 149 Memory Reception Setting cccccceecceeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseeeeee 175 Memory Transmission sessssssssseenssssrrrsssrirnsssttinrnnssttnnnnnnttunnnnatnnnnnnnnten nnne 101 Memory Transmission Report ss sssssssseesssssssirssssrirrrsstinrrnssttinnnssrnnnnnnnstnnnnne 208 Memory Transmission Report Setting cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeestaeeeees 198 Menu LIST cei oein A ieee EEN dee Qn eee ee ee ee 224 Menu Operation ccceccceeeeeececeneeececaeeeeseeeeeseaaaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 35 Multi Address Polling 0 eccecceeeeeecneeeeeeeencneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeenaaeeeeeeeeaaes 143 Multi Address Transmission Broadcasting eesceeeeesseeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaaes 123 Group Broadcast Transmission sssssseseeeeseeeeseeseeessrinesrrrssernrssrnnee 123 Multi Key Quick Broadcast Transmission ccccesseeeeeeeeeeteeees 124 Repo gesteet dee e ENEE Jaan eel nae 210 Report Setting WEE 199 Multi Copy Reception Settings cccccccc
122. AME OO1 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 RX SETTINGS SECURE RX MEMORY RX RX REDUCTION DISCARD REV ORDER PRINT PRIVILEGED RX RTI RX MULTI COPY REPORT amp LIST JOURNAL MANUAL AUTO FAX POLL RELAY REPORTS COMMUNICATION REPORT A5 SIZE PRINT MEMORY TX A5 SIZE PRINT MULTI TX MULTI POLL RELAY ORIGINATOR RELAY STATION RELAY DESTINATION RECEPTION LIST LOCAL MATLBOX REMOTE MATLBOX RELAY STATION REMOTE SERVICE REMOTE ACCESS DOWNLOAD RDC PASSWORD TOTAL PAGE SCAN PRINT OO OO OO OO 0 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF SE mi Kl j nj OFF NO 1 237 Sa ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 amp RX ERROR ERROR IMAGE ERROR IMAGE ERROR ERROR IMAGE ERROR IMAGE ERROR IMAGE JOB Function List Issues a list to confirm the func tions currently set in this fac simile unit Printing Procedure To display the main menu press MENU 7 1 COMM OPTIONS 2 GISTS 3 INITIAL S 4 DEFAULT S UP TINGS J e T To select 2 LISTS press 1 FUNCTION 2 DEPARTMENT 3 ITU MAILBOX Then to select 1 FUNCTION press MENU LIST PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 NAME OPTIONS PAGE NUMBER LINE MONITOR TURNAROUND POLL ECH 5 SECURITY TX LISTS 1 FUNCTION 2 DEPARTMENT 3 ITU MAILBOX
123. CEL JOB TO CANCEL e When no jobs are re served or being pro cessed the screen below is displayed for 2 sec onds NO ENTRY 1 Press the JOB STATUS Key 2 Continue or Cancel the Job 3 Select YES or NO In the Standby Mode press JOB STATUS The status of the line in use is displayed If Line 2 is in use in stead of Line 1 the Line 2 sta tus is displayed in the same for mat JOB STATUS Whenever is pressed the status of the phone line and Pending Jobs will be displayed TRANSMIT A fax transmission is under way RECEIVE A fax reception is under way Pxxx Page Number of the file being processed FILE NBR File Number assigned to this job G3 Communication Mode that is be ing used G3 Standard Group 3 EC Error Correction Mode EX ECM with shortened protocol XXxxxBPS Communication speed Remote Station ID Station ID returned from the re ceiving station if provided The following screen shows an example of the Pending Jobs display status when the phone line is in use NOTE While the screen above is LINE 1 TRANSMIT P005 FILE NBR 999 G3 14400BPS 81 425 85 3002 JOB STATUS displayed pressing again will display the Pending Jobs screen JOB CANCEL Pressing can cancel PENDING JOBS x JOB STATUS TO VIEW JOB CANCEL TO CANCEL the Pending Job See page 121 With the Line 1 or Line
124. DOCUMENT LENGTH Page 60 Enables or Disables the sending of documents longer than 1 Meter 39 4 LINE MONITOR Page 61 Enables or Disables the Line Monitor function RECEIVE INTERVAL Page 62 Sets the interval 0 15 min the machine will wait after making four consecutive dialings NOTE indicates the factory default setting 10 ECM Page 63 Enables or Disables the ECM function Configuration Summary continued 2 Select the Desired Configuration Setting 01 16 continued 11 DOCUMENT MODE Page 64 Selects the default setting for the Resolution Standard Fine U Fine and Contrast Nor mal Darker Lighter for document scanning 12 COLLATE COPY Page 65 Enables or Disables the Col late Copy function 13 LETTER HEAD PAPER Page 66 Enables or Disables the Letter Head Paper function at during PC printing 14 REDIAL MODE Page 67 Sets the number of redials 01 14 05 and redial interval 01min 15min 03 min 15 AUTO RECEIVE MODE Page 68 Configures Auto and Manual receive modes As well as the Ring Delay 01 15 within auto receive mode 16 LINE 2 MODE Page 69 Configures the 2nd Facsimile Line for TX amp RX RX ONLY or RX ONLY TIME PERIOD NOTE indicates the factory default setting Bell Ringer Volume Adjustment The telephone bell ringer vol ume can be adjusted using the following procedure 1 Display th
125. Developer Assembly with Drum Unit 3 Separate the Drum Unit Top Cover Release Lever Developer g Developer 052 Assembly Grasp the Top Cover Release Lever and open the Top Cover Remove the Developer Assem bly with the Drum Unit attached IMPORTANT e Never touch the photo conductive drum the green surface of the Drum Unit If the surface is scarred or scratched it will cause print quality problems e Do not expose the photo conductive drum of the Drum Unit to light for more than 3 minutes If the Drum Unit is to be left anywhere outside the fac simile be certain to cover it with cloth paper etc Separate the Drum Unit from the Developer Assembly Drum Unit Replacement continued A Attach the new Drum Unit to the Developer Assembly 5 Install the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit 6 Press Down on the Drum Unit Drum EB SA Developer 042 Assembly Developer Assembly 043 Drum Unit Attach the new Drum Unit to the Developer Assembly Position the new Drum Unit with the green drum surface facing the black toner roller on the Devel oper Assembly Holding the Developer Assem bly by the green handles align the three shafts on the Devel oper Assembly sides with the slots in the machine frame Press firmly down on the green squares on the Drum Unit until the
126. Drum Unit clicks into place Replacing the Ozone Filter The Ozone Filter should be re placed every time the Drum Unit is replaced A new Ozone Filter has been provided with the Drum Kit Make sure the Ozone Filter is replaced 7 Replace the Ozone Filter Ozone Filter Remove the Ozone Filter from the inside of the machine Then place the new Ozone Fil ter into the machine Drum Unit Replacement continued 8 Close the Top Cover Holding the Top Cover Release Lever close the Top Cover then release the Lever QUICK START This section provides several quick start programming steps to prepare your new facsimile for immediate use These procedures are a simple version of the detailed proce dures listed in the manual Next to each procedure heading is a convenient page number refer ence for the detailed procedure Should you have any difficulty with these simple procedures refer to the pages listed for more information It is highly recommended that you take the time to read through this manual to get the most from your new TOSHIBA facsimile Terminal ID 1 Setting the Terminal ID Page 42 2 Sending a Facsimile Page 101 3 Receiving a Facsimile Page 112 MENU Press G7 3 G ERMINAL ID ID NAME MAX 40 Displayed for 2 seconds Enter your user ID company name using
127. ENTIAL BOX NUMBER MAX20 X Bi or TX BULLETIN BOARD BOX NUMBER MAX20 Sending a Document to a Mailbox Remote Hub continued 5 Enter the Box Number 6 Enter the Password for Reservation 7 Dial the Remote Hub Unit 8 Complete the Procedure Enter the Box Number max 20 digits Then press ENTER If you are sending to a Confi dential Box go to Step 7 If you are sending to a Bulletin Board go to Step 6 TX CONFIDENTIAL ENTER TEL NUMBER SPEED DIAL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY or ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD MAX20 Enter the password to access the Bulletin Board Box Then press ENTER a TX BULLETIN BOARD ENTER TEL NUMBER SPEED DIAL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY Enter the facsimile number of the remote hub unit using any of the following dialing meth ods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 X CONFIDENTIAL EL NUMBER MAX128 123 or X BULLETIN BOARD EL NUMBER MAX128 123 The facsimile starts scanning the document into memory The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds be fore returning to t
128. ER VOLUME 02 POWER SAVER 03 SEPARATOR PAGE 04 DEPARTMENT CODE 4 CCOUNT CODE RINT DENSITY OCUMENT LENGTH ONITOR RECEIVE INTERVAL UU PY UV CO OO OO OO CH OO 0 AJ On UI RR SS oO Q G 4 F ODE COLLATE COPY ETTER HEAD PAPER 1 MODE Lo aa ta PR o Us LA H Ka J e H D LINE 2 MODE NOTE Only 4 selections can be displayed at one time Press Zei or SE until the desired Configuration Setting is highlighted or enter the desired Configuration Setting 01 through 16 from the list below The detailed configuration procedure for each setting is shown in parentheses after the configuration setting 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 SPEAKER VOLUME Page 47 Sets the Bell Ring Alarm Tone Key Touch Tone and Monitor volume 0 7 4 for the machine POWER SAVER Page 51 Configures the machine s Super Power Saver function for Automatic Manual or Off operation SEPARATOR PAGE Page 53 Enables or Disables a FAX Separator Page Copy Separator Page and PC Separator Page DEPARTMENT CODE Page 55 Enables Disables and Configures up to 99 Department Codes ACCOUNT CODE Page 58 Enables or Disables a 4 digit Account Code entry PRINT DENSITY Page 59 Sets the Print Density 2 2 0 for the machine
129. ERATION COMPLE el After completing this Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associ ated pages for instructions or press STOP to exit the Setting mode and re turn to the Standby Mode Default Setting for Security Transmission This function allows transmis sions only when the number you dial matches the number pro grammed in the remote facsimi le If the numbers do not match Security Transmission prevents your facsimile from sending by indicating a transmission error 1 Display the Default 2 Display the 3 Select the Desired Setting Menu SECURITY TX Menu Option Press Press Select the desired option MENU To set Security Transmission to 4 0 ON press Q 2 To set Security Transmission to NW OFF press 01 MEMORY TX SET SECURITY TX OPERATION COMPLETED 02 SECURITY TX 1 OH 03 COVER SHEET 04 RECOVERY TX D 05 TTI 06 SEND AFTER SCAN COPYING Paper Size for Copying You can utilize the DP120F DP125F as a convenient copier to make collated copies of original documents The following are key points when making copies Recording Paper Size The paper sizes usable with your fax unit are limited to Letter or Legal size The received document is recorded printed within the Effective Recording Area of the
130. ESIDUAL MEMORY 97 TTI Transmit Terminal ID Print To properly identify the sender of your documents the DP120F DP125F prints a transmission header TTI on the recording paper of the remote facsimile The information included in the TTI are e Date and Start Time The date and start time when this document is sent to the remote facsimile e Transmitting Station ID Name see page 42 e Transmission Serial Number With each transmission the DP120F DP125F automatically assigns a unique transmission number This number is also printed on the Activity Journals e Page Number Total Number of Pages Each page of the document is printed with a page number followed by the total number of pages in the document e g 001 003 means the first page of three total pages e File Number Each document sent from memory is assigned a file number This file number is used by the DP120F DP125F to assist you in managing multiple document jobs Total Page Transmission Number Serial Number Date Transmission Page Start Time Station ID Name Number File Number 05 17 2000 10 00 FROM TOSHIBA 1 714 583 0000 T 123 P 001 003 F 030 You can select the following options for your TTI information e Inside The document is sent to the receiver with the TTI included in the document data Accordingly if any characters exist near the top edge of the sending data they may be overlapped with the TTI e Outside The document is sent to th
131. FICE Displayed for 2 seconds SCANNING TO MEMORY FILE NBR 091 RESIDUAL MEMORY 99 SCANNING PAGE XXX During scan to memory MAY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 99 During transmission Keypad Dialing If you have not preset the tele phone number of the destination facsimile to an Abbreviated Dial Number or One Touch key you can dial your destination by en tering the number from the Dial Keypad The document must be loaded and the resolution and contrast set before a transmission using Keypad Dialing See page 89 1 Enter the Facsimile Number 2 Press the START Key Enter the facsimile number of the desired party ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS Tuv WXYZ 2 OOO NOTE When an incorrect number is entered use to delete preceding digits or press STOP once to start over from the beginning Example with 012345678 en tered COMM RESERVATION TEL NUMBER MAX128 0123456788 When the correct number is dis played press START D Your facsimile will automatically start scanning the document into memory if enabled While scanning the facsimile will dials connects and starts transmis sion SCANNING TO MEMORY FILE NBR 093 RESIDUAL MEMORY 99 During scan to memory MAY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL ME ORY 99 During transmis
132. If the redial procedure is com pleted without success the screen below is displayed and this transmission job is can celled MAY 17 00 WED11 59 LINE BUSY Once connected to the destina tion facsimile the screen below is displayed COMMUNICATING FILE NBR 025 0559761234 The remote party Terminal ID will be displayed as shown be low COMMUNICATING FILE NBR 025 81 559 761234 Direct Transmission continued Direct Transmission as Default Setting continued DN Send the Document 6 Complete the Transmission The transmission starts as the When the communication is document is scanned complete LINE lamp turns off and the facsimile returns to the The page number being sent is Standby Mode displayed on the 1st row The type of communication and MAY 17 00 WED11 54 transmission speed is displayed on the 3rd row RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TRANSMIT P001 FILE NBR 025 EX 14400BPS 81 559 761234 Direct Transmission continued Temporary Direct Transmission Even if the Memory Transmis sion Mode is selected as the de fault you may desire to transmit a specific document directly from the Automatic Document Feeder This is useful when the docu ment consists of many pages or when the residual memory is too small to store the document data 1 Load the Document 2 Change the Transm
133. K 2 Type D Toshiba Viewer Setup exe 4 Start the Installation Fum BE Type he name of 4 piagam Tote on documen and Wiros wall open i for you Oper Da Juba Huet Geht ep el Cancel Eituse Type D Toshiba Viewer Setup exe where D is your CD ROM drive Click OK Click Next Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer continued D Read the Software License Agreement 7 Select the Program Folder Q Exit the Installation Window Ds ae es eg a ce ta e zs od i ee E Rn ger If you agree the License Agreement click Yes If you click No exit the Installation The Installation is not completed Click Next 6 Choose the Destination Location 8 Start the Copy Click Next CTii a 2 eri p Cp Wait until file copying files is completed The Setup Complete screen automatically appears eon be eed eee r ee Select Yes want to restart my computer now and click Finish NOTE You have to restart the computer before using the TOSHIBA Viewer After restarting the computer the Unimessage Pro de vice wizard automatically runs Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer continued Device Setup After restarting the computer the Unimessage Pro device wizard automatically appears NOTE This device setup wizard can be operated by running the Unimessage Pro Startup Wizard in Program Folder as well When p
134. Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp che pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre coordonn es par un repr sentant d sign par le fournisseur L entreprise de t l communications peut demander a l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil a la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise a la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rerales Avertissement L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements luim me il doit avoir recours a un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou a un lectricien selon le cas L indice d equivalence de la sonnerie de ce mat riel 0 3 AVIS L indice d quivalence de la sonnerie IES assign a chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccord s a une interface La terminaison d une interface t l phonique peut consister en une combinaison de quelques dispositifs
135. M OPTIONS 2 DELAYED COMM 3 TX REPORT Group Number Registration You can send a document to multiple remote parties in a sin gle operation This is referred to as Group Dialing or Multi ad dress Transmission It is useful to preset addresses to which Multi address Transmis sions are often performed in a group To make a Multi address Transmission easier you can as sign such a group to a One Touch key The preset groups can also be used as groups for Multi polling Receptions You can register up to 50 Broad cast Groups using any combina tion of Group Numbers from 1 to 1999 no duplications allowed You may also assign each group an optional name of up to 20 characters Each group can contain any combination of the 300 Abbrevi ated and or 73 One Touch dial locations and can be assigned to a One Touch key 1 Display the TEL LIST ENTRY Menu 2 Display the GROUP NUMBERS Menu 3 Enter a Group Number Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LIST ENTRY TEL LIST ENTRY 1 ABB NUMBERS 2 GROUP NUMBERS 3 ONE TOUCH KEYS To select GROUP NUMBERS press ENTER GROUP NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Enter a Group Number 1 to 1999 Example 1 GROUP NBR ENTRY GROUP NBR 1 1
136. MM 3 TX REPORT To enter a SUB type Sub Ad dress press SUB ADDRESS COMM SUB MAX20 Enter the required number max 20 digits then press ENTER Returns to Step 9g 1 SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 3 SEP 4 PWD To enter a SEP type Sub Ad dress press SUB ADDRESS COMM SEP MAX20 Enter the required number max 20 digits then press ENTER Returns to Step 9g 1 SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 3 SEP 4 PWD One Touch Dialer Registration continued 9 Select Communication Options continued 9g Sub Address Communication continued 9h Select the Telephone Line 99 5 Select a PWD Sub Address Communication To enter a PWD type Sub Ad dress press Q SUB ADDRESS COMM PWD MAX20 Enter the required number max 20 digits then press ENTER L Returns to Step 9g 1 SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 3 SEP 4 PWD If your facsimile is equipped with the 2nd Line Board you will be able to designate which phone line to use Line 1 or Line 2 for this One Touch key by pressing Q To allow the Line to be selected TEL LINE SELECT 1 FIRST AVAILABLE 2 LINE 1 3 LINE 2 automatically press Q To designate Line 1 press To designate Line 2 press Returns to Step 9 COM
137. NE TOUCH 03 CANCELLED SC 2 seconds ENTER ONE TOUCH KEY OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE To change the number or Loca tion ID remote facsimile name currently assigned to an existing One Touch key press to MODIFY The facsimile number currently assigned is displayed on the bottom row ONE TOUCH 03 ID NAME MAX20 Return to Step 3 GE 2 seconds ENTER NAME ID NAME MAX20 Bn Return to Step 3 To retain Touch key assignment press to RETAIN the previous One ENTER ONE TOUCH KEY OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Return to Step 3 to select a dif ferent One Touch key or press STOP to return to the Standby Mode Enter the Location ID name of the remote party to be assigned to the current One Touch key See page 36 for more informa tion on Character Entry When the name is displayed correctly on the LCD display press ENTER ONE TOUCH 03 TEL NUMBER MAX 128 One Touch Dialer Registration continued 7 Enter the Telephone Number 8 Enter the Alternate Number Optional 9 Select Communication Options Advanced Setup Enter the telephone number you want to store up to 128 digits NOTE If your facsimile is co
138. NG RESERVE SECURITY CODE Enter a 4 digit Security Code 0000 to 9999 using the Dial Keypad POLLING RESERVE SECURITY CODE KK KK ENTER Then press POLLING RESERVE SECURITY TEL MAX20 Enter the number of the polling receivers facsimile max 20 digits POLLING RESERVE SECURITY TEL MAX20 1234567898 When the number is displayed ENTER correctly press C Go to Step 7 The facsimile starts scanning the document SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 140 RESIDUAL MEMORY 70 When the document scanning is complete the display returns to the Standby Mode NOTE If a Simple Polling operation is already reserved the fol lowing screen is displayed ALREADY ASSIGNED ADD RETAIN 2 3 You may select one of the fol lowing three options 1 CANCEL Select this option to replace the previous reservation 2 ADD Select this option to add this document to the existing res ervation 3 RETAIN Select this option to retain the existing reservation Public Mailbox Polling Reservation Public Mailbox is a feature used to store a document in memory so that multiple remote parties may poll to receive it at any time No Security Codes are used with this feature The document is retained in memory regardless of how many times it is polled
139. NT NOTE Upon entering a valid 5 digit password the standby prompt will remain on the LCD for one operation or one minute whichever oc curs first Account Code Entry This procedure assumes that you have enabled the Account Code option on page 58 of this manual Once enabled the facsimile will prompt for an Account Code prior to dialing the remote party The entered Account Code will be printed in the Account Code column on the Activity Journal NOTES Account Code tracking is only possible when using the memory communica tions Memory Transmis sion Polling Receptions etc Once entered an Account Code is only effective for that communication proce dure It will automatically clear upon completion of the communication upon job cancellation or upon a communication error Load the Document 2 Enter the Facsimile Number 3 Enter an Account Code 4 Complete the Procedure Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100
140. NTING a TEST RESULT This test result list prints out the results of the individual Select the TEST tests as a self test report RESULT Menu Press Print Sample MENU ICCWWTS1SPc 2CCWWWTS1SPc 3CCWWTS1SPcAA SELF TEST REPORT PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 05 25PM TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 NAME TEST CONTENTS RESULT NOTE DATE AUTO TEST FLASH ROM PROGRAM NG 2086 MAY 17 00 02 18PM FUNCTION NG 59E5 MAY 17 00 02 18PM LANGUAGE NG 805B MAY 17 00 02 19PM SRAM ADDRESS BUS OK MAY 17 00 02 19PM DATA BUS OK MAY 17 00 02 19PM DRAM ADDRESS BUS OK MAY 17 00 02 19PM DATA BUS OK MAY 17 00 02 25PM MODEM LINE 1 NG 57A MAY 17 00 02 25PM LINE 2 NG 57A MAY 17 00 02 25PM H H SCANNER After completion of the list out RAN ox way 17 00 02 25 SHAD ING OK MAY 17 00 02 25PM put the display returns to the coves ox wAY 17 00 02 25PM PRINTER DK MAY 17 00 02 26PM PHONEBOOK OK MAY 17 00 02 26PM standby mode screen INDIVIDUAL TEST ADF TEST OK U F INE MAY 17 00 05 24PM KEY TEST on LED TEST OK MAY 17 00 03 44PM LCD TEST OK MAY 17 00 03 44PM SPEAKER TEST OK MAY 17 00 03 45PM SWITCH TEST OK MAY 17 00 03 47PM REMOTE SERVICE RDC Remote Diagnosis Configuration Service This machine has a function to receive the following services remotely Consult your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for assistance in using this function RDC Remote Diagnosis Configuration This service enables the machine to be dialed from a service
141. O by pressing Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Simple amp Secure Polling continued 5 Enter the Security Code 6 Complete the Procedure Enter the 4 digit security code for the document to be re trieved ABC GHI JKL PQRS TUV WXYZ UI OOO POLLING SECURITY CODE GER When the 4 digit security code is entered press ENTER Go to Step 6 The facsimile will dial the re mote facsimile to retrieve the document When the operation is complete the following screen is displayed for about 2 seconds and your documents will be printed OPERATION COMPLETED FILE NBR 167 Multi Address Polling In a Multi Polling operation the documents are retrieved from multiple remote facsimiles using pre programmed groups One Touch Keys Abbreviated Dial Numbers Alphabet Dial or from the Dial Keypad 1 Display the POLLING Menu 2 Select POLLING 3 Press the MULTI Key 4 Enter the Number of Remote Facsimiles Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press POLLING POLLING 2 POLLING RESERVE 3 PROG CONT POLL Select 1 POLLING by press o POLLING ENTER TEL NUMBER Press MULTI ULTI POLLING ENTER TEL NUMBER SPEED DIAL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY
142. OLL SECURITY CODE G When the 4 digit security code is entered press ENTER LC Go to Step 6 Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the follow ing dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 COMM RESERVATION EMORY 80 UMBER RESIDUAL I Kl H 4 The facsimile will dial the re mote facsimile to perform an or dinary transmission When the transmission is complete poll ing of the document from the re mote facsimile will start immedi ately When the polling operation is complete the Turnaround Poll ing setting is automatically can celled MAILBOX ITU T Compatible This section describes the procedures to setup a Mailbox in the DP120F DP125F hub unit Using this function all ITU T F code compliant facsimiles can reserve transmit or retrieve documents to and from the DP120F DP125F Mailboxes must be setup prior to utilizing the DP120F DP125F as an Mailbox Hub For more informa tion see page 137 Two Types of Mailboxes are available Confidential Box Confidential Box allows a one time document retrieval from the mailbox Once a document is retrieved it is cleared A document retrieval password for accessing the Confidential Box can be added during setup It is importan
143. ONE TOUCH KEY Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NUMBER 110 RESIDUAL MEMORY 90 Low Speed Transmission If communication errors fre quently occur while transmitting documents due to bad line con ditions we recommend you to select a lower transmission speed to enable quality trans missions The transmission speed will be restored to the de fault value automatically after the low speed transmission is completed You can activate this option while programming an Abbrevi ated Dial Number page 70 or One Touch Dial Key page 77 if communication with a certain remote party always requires this option 1 Load the Document 2 Display the QUALITY TX Menu 3 Select a Speed 4 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 13 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press LOWSPEED TX C QUALITY TX ORR
144. ORT FILE NUMBER S 005 DATE G MAY 17 14 18 DOCUMENT PAGES 1 5 START TIME MAY 17 10 56 END TIME S MAY 17 14 18 RECOVERY SUCCESSFUL GROUP NUMBER 0001 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST ONE TOUCH NUMBER 01 TSRORPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA TEL NUMBER 12345678901234567890 UNSUCCESSFUL SENT PAGES GROUP NUMBER 0002 AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBERI 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 TIME MAY 17 14 18 ABB 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 OT 02 05 OT 33 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG 01 This is the result report printed after a Multi address Transmis sion Printing Procedure Receiver where an error occurred SENT PAGES Number of pages sent normally Receiver where the transmission was completed normally Auto Print if programmed see page 199 Printing will automatically start after all transmissions in the operation have been completed successfully or unsuccessfully Multi Polling Report MULTI POLLING REPORT PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBERI 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 FILE NUMBER 4 005 DATE 7 MAY 17 14 18 DOCUMENT PAGES 15 START TIME G MAY 17 10 56 END TIME MAY 17 14 18 RECOVERY TIME MAY 17 14 18 SUCCESSFUL GROUP NUMBER 0001 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST ABB 001 0
145. P BOOK PANEL O THE LEFT HAND SIDE If both Flip Panels are set on the left hand side of the Opera tion Panel the screen below is displayed In this case reverse the left and right for the opera tion in Step 7 SWITCH TEST FLIP BOOK PANEL ON THE RIGHT HAND SIDE SWITCH TEST continued d Check the Flip Panels 8 Completed the SWITCH TEST Set both Flip Panels on the left hand side The result of the switch test OK or NG is displayed on the screen and the unit returns to the individual test selection screen SWITCH TEST OK If one Flip Panel is set on ei ther side move the Flip Panel on the right hand side to the left hand side and then move them to the right hand side The result of the switch test can be confirmed with the self test report To print the self test report refer to PRINTING A TEST RESULT on page 252 If the result of the switch test is judged to be NG call your service representative TEST PRINT The test print checks the print function by printing a test pat 1 Select the TEST tern PRINT Menu Press Print Sample MENU f MAY 17 00 WED11 13 RESULT MEMORY 100 PRINTING LIST The test pattern is printed and the unit returns to the standby mode screen TEST RESULT PRI
146. PLE Wi el ing Report Setting you may continue to select other Report settings referring to their associ ated pages for instruction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Relay Originator Report Setting 1 Display the RELAY ORG REPORT Menu 2 Select the Option for Relay Originator 3 Set the Option for First Page Image Press MENU OHOHOHOHOHORG SET RELAY ORG REPT 1 ALWAYS 2 ON ERROR 3 0FF Select the desired option to print a report whenever a Relay trans mission is sent NOTE This is only applicable if the DP120F DP125F is used as an Originator for a relay trans mission see page 134 To ALWAYS print a report when ever a document is transmitted press To only print a report when an er ror has occurred press To turn OFF Automatic printing of reports press PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE ERONI 2 OFF zl To print a first page image of the facsimile document on the trans mission report press 2 To not print a first page image of the facsimile document on the transmission report press The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COMPLE Wi el After completing the Relay Originator Report Setting you may continue to select other Report settings referring to their associated page
147. Polling a Document from a Mailbox Remote Hub 157 Printing a Document from a Mailbox Local Hub n se 159 Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox Local Hub 161 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS eeeeeeeees 163 Department Code ACCESS 0 0 eeceeeceeneeeeeeeteeeseeeeeaeseaeeeeaeeteeeeeaeeeaaes 163 Account Code EN EE 164 Cover Sheet Registration cccccecceeeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeseeneeeenaeeees 165 Chain RIED EE 166 TTI Transmit Terminal ID Print eee ceeeeee seen ee eee eeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeaea 167 Setting Recovery Transmission ccccccceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseueeeeeeeeees 168 Sending Recovery Transmission cccceseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeneeeees 169 PIN WO EE 171 Disabling ECM Temporarily cccccceeceeeeeeceeeeeeneeesecaeeeeeneeeessaaeeeeaes 172 ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS cccssssseeeeteteeeeees 173 Privileged KeCeptonm eege DEE aeteevece tee AER Nee deeg 173 RTI Remote Terminal ID Prmt ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeees 174 Display the RT Menu mieastisset neeh eey eere RE a e ea RE en EEKE AE 174 Select the RTI Print Option cccceseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 174 Memory Reception Setting ccccccecceeceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeesaaeeee 175 Secure Reception Access Code Setting c cceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeneeees 176 Secure RX Activation Period Setting cecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeet
148. RN BLACK AND THEN CLEAR PRESS START KEY Press START BE All of the elements of the LCD should turn on as is the ex ample below Five seconds later all the ele ments should turn off Visually check that all the elements have turned on and off nor mally The test result input screen is displayed five sec onds after the elements turn off LCD TEST ENTER TEST RESULT If all elements of the LCD turn on and off normally press If even one elements fails to turn on and off press The word OPERATION COM PLETED is displayed on the screen and the unit returns to the individual test selection screen The result of the LCD test can be confirmed with the self test report To print the self test re port refer to PRINTING A TEST RESULT on page 252 If the result of the LCD test is judged to be NG call your ser vice representative SPEAKER TEST The speaker test checks speaker operation by changing the volume output from the speaker 1 Select the SPEAKER 2 Select the SPEAKER 3 Select the Test Result 4 Completed the TEST Menu TEST Option Option SPEAKER TEST Press Select a speaker volume level If all volumes are output nor The word OPERATION COM MENU mally press PLETED is displayed on the 4 by using
149. Requirements AAR 261 Configuration of the CD ROM EEN 261 Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer AER 262 Installation eu a elaine EES 262 Device Set p sc cwisiras ties tenth Ee A tee eee ee 264 Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer 268 DESCRIPTION OF THE FUNCTIONG ccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 269 Description of the Main Welcome Menu ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 269 Browse Folders eier ocean hee steen ee 270 Changing the Device Configuration ccccecesceeeeeeeeeeeseneeeessteeeeeees 270 Saving the Device Configuration ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeenaeeteaes 273 Add Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP120F DP125F sssseeseenee 275 Saving the Phonebook sssssssssessssesssssssiessrrsssrrsssrnsstnnstnnnsrnnsrrnnsrnnn 277 Creating a Routing Rules 0 ceeecceeeeececeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeneeeseeeeesaaeeeenes 279 Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders s 280 Creating Folder AA 281 PIL SSCA ss be oe etcc tented bal seoaimeae died a ah cet tena een 282 Scanning with your DP120F DP125F or other TWAIN elle le Ee EE 282 TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer ceeccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeneees 284 Printing from TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad l 284 Printing from Other Application ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaeeeees 285 INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION TOSHIBA Viewer has been specially designed for use with DP120F DP125F s Multi Function Peripherals
150. SEND AFTER SCAN Menu 3 Select the Send After Scan Option Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 MAY 17 00 WED11 13 G ESIDUAL MEMORY 100 ENTER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panels to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press SEND AFTER SCAN D AFTER SCAN Pw K Z N a lt bei r Select the desired Send After Scan Option To disable Send After Scan press The following screen is dis played You may dial the remote facsimile for your communica tion job The display will return to the Standby Mode in about 60 seconds if no keys are pressed OPERATION COMPLE el ER 2 seconds RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Go to Step 5 To enable Send After Scan press WHEN MEMORY FULL 1 DELETE SCAN PAGES 2 SEND SCAN PAGES Go to Step 4 Enabling or Disabling Send After Scan Temporarily contined 4 Select the Memory Full Option 5 Enter the Facsimile Number Select the desired Memory Full Option To delete the pages being scanned press 2 To send the pages being scanned press The following screen is dis played You may now dial the remote facsimile for your com munication job The
151. SIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Press MENU O PAGE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER 1 999 Enter the number of document pages 1 to 999 OOJO SLO PQRS Tuv WXYZ 21012 2 The press ENTER COMM Kal n ERVATION EMORY 100 UMBER RESIDUAL T DO GI 4 Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods or you may designate another option at this point e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Alphabet Dialing See page 98 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Line Monitor This function is used to set the facsimile s speaker ON in order to monitor the phone line for one communication only This func tion is mainly used to confirm di aling and phone line status You can activate this option when programming an Abbrevi ated Dial Number page 70 or One Touch Dial Key page 77 if communication with a certain re mote party always requires this option 1 Load the Document 2 Display the LINE MONITOR Menu 3 Select the Option 4 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AAY 17 00 WED11 13 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER
152. Security Code with TOSHIBA facsimiles only Go to Step 6a 3 TEL NO Select this option to use the telephone number of the polling remote facsimile s as the security code Go to Step 6b 4 CODE amp TEL NO Select this option to use both a 4 digit security code and a telephone number Go to Step 6c Select 2 SECURITY CODE by pressing POLLING RESERVE SECURITY CODE Enter a 4 digit Security Code 0000 to 9999 using the Dial Keypad Each digit of the en tered code is displayed as an asterisk POLLING RESERVE SECURITY CODE KKK Then press ENTER Go to Step 7 NOTE You must provide this 4 digit number to the remote party in advance or they will not be able to retrieve this docu ment If no code or an incor rect code is used a polling error will occur Select 3 TEL NO by pressing Enter the number of the polling POLLING RESERVE ECURITY TEL MAX20 s remote facsimile using the Dial Keypad max 20 digits POLLING RESERVE SECURITY TEL MAX20 1234567899 Then press ENTER lt 4 Go to Step 7 NOTE This number must be pro grammed in the terminal ID of the remote facsimile If no number or an unmatched number is in the terminal ID a polling error will occur Select 4 CODE amp TEL NO by pressing POLLI
153. TE Return to Step 3 To change the number or Loca tion ID remote facsimile name currently assigned to an exist ing Abbreviated Dial Number press to MODIFY The facsimile number currently assigned is displayed on the bottom row ps ABB NBR 001 ID NAME MAX20 ENTER NAME ID NAME MAX20 BXxxxx Skip to Step 6 E 2 seconds If you do not wish to change the Abbreviated Dial Number infor mation press 2 to RETAIN ENTER ABB NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Return to Step 3 to select a dif ferent Abbreviated Dial Number STOP or press to return to the Standby Mode Abbreviated Dialer Registration continued 6 Enter the Location ID Name 7 Enter the Telephone Number Enter an Alternate Number Optional Enter the Location ID name of the remote party to be assigned to the current Abbreviated Dial Number See page 36 for more informa tion on Character Entry When the name is displayed correctly on the LCD display press ENTER C ABB NBR 001 fe NUMBER MAX 128 Enter the telephone number you want to store up to 128 digits NOTE If your facsimile is connected to a PBX system you may need to enter an access digit 9 and a pause so the sys tem wi
154. TES e The Transmitting Station ID Number will only be provided if it is programmed in the remote facsimile s Terminal ID e The Receiving Station ID will only be provided if it is programmed in this facsimile s Terminal ID 1 Display the RTI Menu 2 Select the RTI Print Option Press MENU RTI 1 0N 2 0FF Select the RTI Print option To print press Not to print press OPERATION COMPLE 4H el Memory Reception Setting When the printer becomes unavailable during a document recep tion due to a recording paper jam toner empty or other error condi tion this facsimile backs up the received data by storing it in memory Once the document is stored in memory the message Memory Reception is displayed on the LCD display In addition the LCD provides a message to indicate the error that caused the Memory Reception MAY 17 00 WED10 22 PAPER EMPTY RESIDUAL MEMORY 90 MEMORY RECEPTION To retrieve the data stored in memory simply correct the error con dition such as refill your paper tray with recording paper Your document will be printed automatically NOTES e The default setting is ON e When OFF is selected no receptions will be possible should the paper supply be exhausted or a paper jam occurs e Note that Memory Reception will not occur when the re sidual memory is zero When the res
155. TMENT 3 ITU MAILBOX Then to select 2 DEPART MENT press 217 Preset Dialing Number Lists These are listings of the preset Abbreviated Dial Numbers One Touch Keys Multi address Groups and Alphabetical sort You can request all of these lists except Alphabetical Sort List as part of one operation se quence or individually one by one All of Lists The following will be printed For the print format and description of printed items see the page listed below e Abbreviated Dial Number List page 220 e Group Number List page 221 e One Touch Number List page 222 Issues all four lists one after another in one operation se quence Printing Procedure Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LIST PRINT CL To select 5 ALL REPORT press Preset Dialing Number Lists continued Alphabetical Sort List Issues a listing of names pro grammed to Abbreviated Dial Numbers One Touch Keys and Group Numbers PHONEBOOK IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBER1 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 Printing Procedure NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 NAME LOCATION FAX NUMBER E MAIL ADDRESS Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired
156. TOSHIBA PLAIN PAPER FACSIMILE Dpi2nF Zanter OPERATOR S MANUAL EPA ENERGY STAR L t The United States Environmental Protection Agency EPA has introduced a voluntary program the ENERGY STAR Program to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy efficient technologies that enhance the workplace improve product performance prevent pollution and reduce your energy costs As an ENERGY STAR Partner Toshiba has determined that this facsimile model meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency ENERGY STAR guidelines require that all ENERGY STAR facsimiles maintain very low power consumption during idle state or have a Power Saver feature that will automatically stand down to an idle state after a period of inactivity For more information on the ENERGY STAR Program please contact ENERGY STAR Printers Fax Machines US EPA 62023 Washington DC 20460 ENERGY STAR is a U S registered mark NOTICE TO USERS Please read through this manual before using the machine After reading it be certain to keep it so that you may refer to it whenever necessary US A WARNING FCC Notice Part 15 This terminal has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates and c
157. To delete the selected docu ment stored for resending press To retain the selected document stored for resending press Some telephone PBX Private Branch Exchange systems can track and monitor all outgoing calls made by a facsimile This is done by entering a PIN code after dialing the destination fac simile number The Toshiba DP120F DP125F faciliates the telephone PBX system by masking the PIN en tered with a on both the LCD and TX Reports Journals NOTE This feature is limited to key pad dialing This feature is not available with Abbreviated Alphabet or One Touch Key dialing 1 Load the Document 2 Enter the Facsimile Number 3 Press the MULTI Key 4 Enter the PIN Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AAY 17 00 WED20 58 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Enter the number of the remote facsimile COMM RESERVATION TEL NUMBER MAX 128 171455512129 Select the Flip Panel 50 73 view on the Operation Panel Press the CHARGE CODE key to initiate the PIN number se quence A will be displayed on the LCD display CHARGE CODE C COMM RESERVATION TEL NUMBER MAX 128 171455512120 Enter the PIN
158. Top Cover is closed the unit automati cally returns to the Standby Mode If there is any received document stored in memory If a recording paper jam oc curs during a reception the received documents are au tomatically stored in memo ry In that case the facsimi le will automatically print out the received contents stored in memory after clearing the paper jam When the Recorded Image is not Clear If the Document Scanner Unit is dirty your documents may not be transmitted clearly If the Recording Unit is dirty the document you receive may not be clear In that case clean the Document Scanner Unit or Re cording Unit using the following procedures You can check these problems by making a copy Examples of print problem D i yt TF tl TF Vertical black line s Vertical white line s TF Horizontal black line s Horizontal white line s TF Faint or blurred print lt TF Stained If the problem occurs during both a transmission and in copy mode check the Document Scanner Unit If the problem occurs during both receptions and copy mode check the Recording Unit Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure 1 Open the Scanner Cover o Wipe the Glass Surface and White Plate 3 Wipe the ADF Pad and Rollers Scanner Cover Release Button
159. Transmission Originator Report cccscceeeeeeeeeseeeseteeeeeeees Relay Transmission Originator Report Setting eeeeeeeseeesseeeseeee Relay Transmission Relay Station Report sseeeseeeeeeeeereserereenr Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub Setting Up a Relay Bon ele Remote Terminal ID RTI Print 0 0 0 ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenaeeees Replacement Bil Fueertleanmer eege dees NEE ESA OZONE TEE EEGEE Printing SUPPIIES EE Neie Tree E Reports see Lists And Reports Reservationjkist ege EE EE eee tae ea dae ees Residual Memory amp File Number AA Resolution Scan Setting Adjustment eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeteaeeteeeees Reverse Order Printing Geng Ring Volume AdjUStMent A RTI Remote Terminal ID Print 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees S Scan Resolution wisi ena ae Gee Ge pei a eae eae Secure Polling sisi iss erase tien et DEES dee Secure Reception sessi aiie aa ENEE aaa aati ere tee Access Code Setting cccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeesaaeseeneees Activation Period EEN Manual ACtivation aene eaa eE VETE Manual RX PTN as iena ia a To A a a i aa Security Code see also Passwords and Access Codes Polling Security Code ceceececceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeseeeeeeeseeeesseeeteees Secure Reception sssssseeessseesssessessstrssertsernnnrnntttnnsttensrnenssenssennnenn Security Polling Reservation cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
160. X EMOTE MAILBOX ELAY Select the desired option To select the LOCAL MAIL BOX press IAU Go to Step 3 To select the REMOTE MAIL BOX press O Go to Step 4 To select the RELAY press O amp Go to Step 5 When 1 LOCAL MAILBOX is selected in Step 2 the following screen displays LOCAL MAILBOX LIST IL ON 2 OFF To turn ON press 2 To turn OFF press OPERATION COMPLE el When 2 REMOTE MAILBOX is selected in Step 2 the follow ing screen displays REMOTE MAILBOX LIST 1 ON 2 0FF To turn ON press 2 To turn OFF press OPERATION COMPLE H When 3 RELAY is selected in Step 2 the following screen dis plays RELAY RECEPTION LIST 1 ON 2 OFF To turn ON press D To turn OFF press OPERATION COMPLETED LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND PRINTING PROCEDURE Transmission Reception Journal Communication Journal Transmission Reception Journal shows the result of each com munication for up to the past 150 transmissions receptions Facsimile Telephone Number TO is replaced with FROM ne te of this facsimile unit Line 1 ina RECEPTION JOURNAL i Facsimile Telephone Number Machine Counter of this facsimile unit Line 2 Information Time of output of this
161. a a Nia Sanear 94 Copying Procedure ccccccecseeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseaeeeseeeeeeeeaaeesecaeeeneaeees 95 DIALING METHODS geeeeeggeeegegtge uekguEsE enges gugeeeegegegegesdeen 97 One Touch Key Dialing csecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeseeaeees 97 Abbreviated Dialing cee ceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeees 98 Alphabet Didinant anara T AS A AEE R 99 Keypad Dialing erasini ierat Draaier iai EEN AEE NUTNE 100 TRANSMITTING 2eegeeEeeeegeegee ege ege 101 Memory Transmission assssseeesesrrrssserrrrreesrinnasestnnnnneeetrnnnanenennnenentennnnee 101 Memory Transmission Procedure ssssssssseessssesrrssserrirrsssrrrnnsssreens 102 Direct Iransmtesion ehia a AAAA AEEA A A 103 Direct Transmission as Default Geng 103 Temporary Direct Transmission cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneaaees 105 On hook Transmission Monitor Speaker Dialing cceeeeeee 106 Off hook Transmission Optional Handset Dialing 0esseeeeeeeee 107 External Off hook Transmission Transmission Using an External Telephone esenee 109 Redialing EE 110 Automatic RECialiing reroncen A EK EAA aA 110 Manual Redialing Direct Transmission eseeeeeeeeeeeserresreernnseneens 110 Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory sssessssessessssserrrssserrrrsssrerrrsssrseens 111 siae A E EE E TT 112 Automatic Receiving Mode AA 112 Manual Receiving Mode A 112 Selecting the Receiving Mode
162. a cot ton swab Developer Assembly Position the Drum Unit with the green drum surface facing the black toner roller on the Devel oper Assembly bly with the Drum Unit at tached and close the Top Cover e When the Top Cover is closed the unit automati cally returns to the Standby Mode USER TEST MODE AUTOMATIC TEST MODE AUTO TEST AUTO TEST mode permits you to automatically perform a series of machine tests in one operation The test items performed by the AUTO TEST are FLASH ROM TEST Checks the program data function data and language data SRAM TEST Checks the SRAM Memory DRAM TEST Checks the DRAM Memory MODEM TEST Line 1 Line 2 Only when installed Checks the modem and detects a line current SCANNER TEST Checks the image scanner CODEC TEST Checks the CODEC IC PRINTER TEST Checks the printer components for proper operation and prints one test page PHONE BOOK DATA TEST Checks the phone book data NOTE AUTO TEST cannot be performed if the data such as re ceived data delayed transmission or polling data is stored in the memory 1 Display the TEST 2 Select the AUTO 3 Completed the MODE Menu TEST Menu AUTO TEST Press Press When all the tests end the MENU word OPERATION COM PLETED is displayed on the 2 screen and the display returns 1 AUTO TEST 2 INDIVIDUAL TEST 3 TEST RESULT LIST
163. a j eiga Et Clari Ume Pex juraren Fes rhi der ee Click Finish TOSHIBA Viewer TOSHIBA Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel 3 Confirm File Deletion dialog appears 5 uninstallation starts E E f Rp i E ay ines see Double click Add Remove Programs K A FS Dsg io comers eres Liege bei ae ad coe Se sl Click Yes 2 Select Unimessage Pro 4 TOSHIBA Viewer alert dialog appears geng a ae PES ee rt j Je L Se eS SS ol 4 SELI Z j _ Click Add Remove l k Pissie rma al cones on Pa Se ba donad baut Soeur ST ze Exit all applications running on your machine and click OK yr ost gar a te Een ee pe re fers pwr apin Fee tein aro ade ee eo rs barm Oa gr er Viens me aa m tte Ea fa op ann a a a iepr pr re ssa mpi b rem a r ba C 1 rks pl rage ob zm ee ts a Ir mee res if After removing files is completed click OK NOTE During the uninstallation the confirmation dialogs for removing the shared files appear Click OK to delete all shared files in the TOSHIBA Viewer pro gram folder Than re reir Ep ge binary rias Ha rm ee iP PE eee eg ee ee eg e FR red oy aed ary Pe m ee ay E ee deg peel Be b ctara E ll et ee ug ebe B r bprei rg s t bas Ltb ba eng er i l eer Te res WEEN TO F aga Fhe age r E
164. acement Drum Kits include an Ozone Filter and Drum unit Be sure to replace the Ozone Filter when replacing the Drum Unit Your TOSHIBA facsimile has been designed to display a two stage alert to replace the Drum Unit once it has been depleted The first stage is a DRUM UNIT WARNING that alerts you that the Drum Unit is at or near its end of life and should be re placed at your earliest convince The unit will continue to receive and print facsimile messages during this stage The second stage is REPLACE DRUM UNIT When this mes sage is displayed the machine can no longer print documents Receptions will be stored in memory until the Drum Unit has been replaced For the purpose of determining Drum usage Each legal size sheet of paper counts as 1 3 letter size sheets of paper STORAGE NOTES The Drum Unit is a very im portant part of this facsimile Handle it with care as shown below Keep the Drum Unit within a temperature range of 0 35 C 32 95 F and a humidity range of 20 80 RH without condensation Do not store or use the Drum Unit in an environment where the temperature changes excessively Do not touch the light sensi tive drum because its sur face will be easily damaged Do not place the light sensi tive drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sun light or high intensity light more than 200 Ix such as near a window 1 Open the Top Cover o Remove the
165. acsimile unit This may result in electric shock hazard or machine malfunction Keep fire sources away from the facsimile unit This may create a fire hazard Keep paper clips and staples away from the unit If metal objects fall in the unit it may damage the machine Avoid opening the unit while it is scanning or printing The operation will stop and it may cause a malfunction and or damage Do not drop hit or apply excessive shocks to the unit as this may result in damage to the unit When using international or discount communications services communication reliability may be impaired Use of non authorized parts or supplies may result in damage to the unit and could result in termination of the service or warranty agreement If any abnormal conditions occur such as emitting of smoke or burning odor immediately disconnect power to the unit and contact your authorized Toshiba dealer for service INTRODUCTION FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS Front View Document Guides Document Pait Tray Adjust the guides to the edges of Stacks the original the document to help ensure proper documents after scanning document alignment and smooth feeding See page 88 Scanner Cover Release Button Provides access to the document scanner area for periodic cleaning or clearing jammed originals See page 232 Document Exit Tray Extension Supports long original documents after scanning See page 19 Docume
166. acsimile will dial the re mote facsimiles to retrieve the documents When the operation is complete the following screen is displayed for about 2 seconds and your documents will be printed el OPERATION COMPLE FILE NBR 167 Continuous Polling Use this procedure to poll the same remote facsimile s on a regular schedule Continuous Polling operations can be pro grammed for specific time inter vals on the days selected In ad dition a 4 digit security code can be used with other TOSHI BA facsimiles when the docu ment has a security code pro grammed NOTES e Calls are performed within the set time period on the days selected with the set interval between callings e If multiple sending sta tions are programmed callings are performed to all those stations within the set time period e If the polling operation exceeds the set time pe riod it will continue until all the facsimiles have been polled e Redialing or calling to al ternate dialing numbers is not available during this operation e H a power failure occurs during this procedure the polling continues when power is restored e If the set time period is shorter than the set call ing interval polling will be performed only once at the start time 1 Display the POLLING Menu 2 Select PROG CONT POLL 3 Enter the Polling Interval 4 Enter the Start and Stop Time Tur
167. age and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual In order to program this information into your fax machine you should complete the setup procedures listed for station ID number and name on pages 42 and 43 in this manual This equipment is hearing aid compatible NOTICE TO USERS Canada NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certifi cation means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective op erational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equip ment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect a facsimile to the facilities of their local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degrada tion of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of t
168. al or Transmission Journal and Re ception Journal separately can be issued to confirm 150 trans missions and 150 receptions With the Standby Mode screen displayed select the 50 73 view on the Flip Panels Press JOURNAL GS A communication journal is is sued See page 195 CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB Cancelling a Direct Transmission 1 A Document is Being Transmitted 2 Press the STOP Key 3 Select the Desired Option A screen such as the one below is displayed while a document is being transmitted in the Di rect Transmission Mode TRANSMIT P001 FILE NBR 001 EX 14400BPS 81425867449 Press STOP CANCEL 1 81123456789 2 NO Select the desired option To cancel the press transmission To continue the transmission press Cancelling a Job Reservation Reserved jobs can be cancelled while they remain in memory The following 5 types of jobs can be cancelled using this pro cedure TRANSMIT RECEIVE POLLING POLLING RESERVE JOB NUMBER aoPonN gt 1 Display the JOB CANCEL Menu In the Standby Mode press JOB CANCEL The following screen is dis played with the first three items 1 to 3 indicated JOB CANCEL 1 TRANSMIT 2 RECEIVE 3 POLLING 4 POLLING RESERVE 5 JOB NUMBER NOTE The types of jobs displayed within the Job Cancel scree
169. al key setting page 77 if communication with the remote party always re quires this option Otherwise use the following procedure 1 Load the Document 2 Display the DELAYED COMM Menu 3 Enter the Time and Date 4 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 13 RESIDUAL TER TEL MEMORY 100 UMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press DELAYED COMM L DELAYED COMM TIME HH MM DD NOTE It is not necessary to input a day of month if you wish the communication to be com pleted within the next 24 hour period Simply leave the day of month area blank Enter the time and day of month to start the communica tion ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ The cursor moves to the next right digit as a numeric value is entered on each digit Use the Tal key to backspace and de lete the values on the digits al ready entered Press ENTER L COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL ER TEL EMORY 100 UMBER 4 Enter the number of the remote facsimile using any of the fol lowing dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98
170. al text and er tra Fine Mode Gg r graphics with extra clarity on 2 S Geer U FINE Ultra Fine e EINE For sending fine text and O U FINE Fine Halftone Mode graphics with extra clarity HALFTONE FINE HALFTONE For detailed photos or docu ments with colors or shading FINE U FINE Ultra Fine Halftone Mode HALFTONE E KO U FINE HALFTONE Ultra Fine Halftone For very detailed photos or When Ultra Fine is selected the DF120F DP125F will scan all documents with colors or documents at 406 dots inch horizontal x 391 lines inch vertical shading Depending on the capabilities of the remote facsimile receiving this document the document may be transmitted by the DF120F DP125F at Ultra Fine resolution 406 dots inch horizontal x 391 lines inche vertical or it may be transmitted at Super Fine 203 dots inch horizontal x 391 lines inch vertical Contrast Setting The Contrast Setting adjusts the print darkness of the document to be read The contrast can be set to one of the following settings The facsimile will return to the de fault setting after each transac tion To change the default contrast setting see page 64 NORMAL For standard originals DARKER To darken light originals e for documents with light or faint print LIGHTER To lighten the dark originals Le for documents with dark print or shaded areas 1 Display the SET CONTRAST Menu 2 Select the Contrast
171. an radiate radio fre quency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with this guide may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this terminal in a residen tial area is likely to cause harmful interferences in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense WARNING FCC Notice Part 68 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive REN s on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total REN s contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area If your facsimile machine causes harm to the telephone network the telephone com pany will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as pos sible also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if
172. and TWAIN compatible scanning devices Subject to the device with which you are using TOSHIBA Viewer and the configuration of your specific copy of TOSHIBA Viewer available features of TOSHIBA Viewer include Scanning hard copy documents using your TWAIN scanner Using your DP120F DP125F as a printer Using your DP120F DP125F as a scanner Configuring your DP120F DP125F from the PC Create or edit the Phone Fax numbers stored in your DP120F DP125F from the PC Creating contacts in your TOSHIBA Viewer Phonebooks for frequently used fax numbers and e mail addresses Creating graphics files in the Unimessage Pro Viewer Storing properties of files in the Unimessage Pro folders to be used with TOSHIBA Viewer s sophisticated search engine Routing of scanned images using TOSHIBA Viewer s simple wizard style Routing Rules This manual gives instructions on how to install TOSHIBA Viewer and basic information about some of the other functions listed above Upgrading Unimessage Pro for TOSHIBA Viewer Unimessage Pro for TOSHIBA Viewer can be upgraded to Add features for example e mail functions are not included in all Unimessage Pro configurations Support multiple users on a LAN Support several devices at the same time To update upgrade your copy of Unimessage Pro for TOSHIBA Viewer contact your TOSHIBA authorized dealer INSTALLATION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION NOTE 8 The Requirements indicated Computer Requirements here are
173. andset When the transmission is com pleted the facsimile returns to the Standby Mode MAY 17 00 WED11 54 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 Direct Transmission continued External Off hook Transmission Transmission Using an External Telephone This procedure may be useful when you want to talk with a re mote party before sending a document A telephone set must be connected to the TEL con nector This telephone set is called the External Telephone in this manual 1 Load the Document 2 Pick Up the Handset of the Extemal Telephone 3 Dial on the External Telephone 4 Press The START Key Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Pick up the handset of the Ex ternal Telephone connected to the TEL connector of the fac simile The External Telephone is con nected to the telephone line via the facsimile and the dial tone is heard through the speaker of the External Telephone The display on the facsimile shows EXTERNAL OFF HOOK on the top row of the LCD display EXTERNAL OFF HOOK Dial the facsimile number of the remote party using the keypad of the External Telephone The entered number is immedi ately dialed The number
174. aper cccccceeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeees 19 INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION 20 Recording Paper Installation cecceceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaeees 20 Recording Paper Size Adjustment 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeens 22 Bypass Tray Installation serere eneren AEn E EEE EENE EER KERN EEEE 23 Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation 2 0 0 0 eee 25 Fuser Cleaner Installation ccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseseeesecaeeeeeneeeessaeesseas 27 PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT ccccccccccccceseees 28 Toner Cartridge Heplacement 28 Drum Unit Replacement AAA 31 QUICK START ssississsscssveisssasssassennniczestwesicuestinninsiseccinaevencivenaineureuewes 34 Terminal lD i cccctiien ated th eet wah eee aa lideie ieee ieee 34 T To vu un ue EE 34 IR Le WEE 34 USER INTERFACE OPERATION csccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 35 Menu Operation 2c 000 teeter itd aa avd ada aa iaiia i net he 35 Keys Used in Menu Operation cc ccccscceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesenaeees 35 Character Entry moii ett Ravin De ea ie ein 36 Keys Used in Character Entry 0 c cceceeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeeeneees 36 Special Character Table sssssssossneesseessseesnessserrsesnnesnnernnnssrenssenn 36 Character Correction ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeeeeeaaeeee 37 INITIAL OT 38 Initial Setting Gummar AANEREN
175. at this facsimile does not produce hazardous laser radiation HLHI ML IHHL MATT All laser light emitted inside the facsimile is completely confined within protective housings when any part of the facsimile is opened This means that the facsimile is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance Adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure l The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for prod ucts marketed in the United States The sample label shown below indicates compli TOSHIBA ie pomi i 7 r SE TOSHIBA FACSIMILE FACSIMIL an any interfer je ance with these CDRH regulations and is attached to all laser facsimiles marketed in MULTIFUNCIONAL Ge 001 he United Stat MODEL MODELO DP120F Byen Seeme the Unite ates 11027 127v 110 127V Jack No USOC RIE s t REN 28 This Class A aaa apparatus meets all requirements of the QDs wu A EE KR w Cet appareil num rique de la AO Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other aor ee than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radia TEE Tetere broulleur cu Canada tion exposure TOSHIBA EE Only trained and quali
176. ave time and phone charges by setting up a relay system By sending your document to a Hub Station you can then instruct the Hub Station to retransmit the document to the end stations in their local geographical area End Station Group stations to finally re ceive the document End Station Originator Station What is a Relay Relay Transmission A Relay Transmission where two levels of Hub Stations are involved is called a Relay Relay Transmission In a Relay Relay Transmission the first Hub Station sends the document to another Hub Station s which then transmits them to additional end stations End Station Group stations to finally re ceive the document End Station End Station End Station Hub Station Originator Station Hub Station To perform Relay Transmissions or Relay Relay Transmissions you must build a network beforehand Consult your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for assistance in using this function Conditions for a Relay Relay Relay Transmission Network 1 The sending station must be a TOSHIBA DP120F DP125F DP80F DP85F fac simile or another ITU T relay communication compatible facsimile unit 2 The Hub Station must be a TOSHIBA DP120F DP125F facsimile or another ITU T relay communication compatible facsimile unit with the Hub Station func tions 3 The relay station must program the end station telephone numbers to Abbrevi ated Dial numbers or On
177. ber Document Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 When the desired job is dis Enter the new facsimile num Press 73 view to select the desired played you have an option to ber JOB CANCEL Function Key re transmit the document or to hac Ge permanently delete the job from 2 3 Press memory GHI JKL MNO RECOVERY TX You can also change the num 6 CANCEL C ber of the remote facsimile if di ce EE EE Se S 123 i aled from the Dial Keypad oi SNO Press the 4 or Zei is to view the jobs stored for resending The information dis played on the LCD display 1st row Type of transmission 2nd row ID name or dial number of the destination 3rd row Date and time when the document file was stored into memory 4th row File number assigned to the transmission job RECOVERY TRANSMIT ENTER START CANCEL DELE T SEARCH Hi T To re transmit the document or change the facsimile number ENTER press Cu SINGLE TRANSMIT 1 START 2 CHANGE To start the transmission press Q To change the number press TEL NUMBER MAX128 82345 To cancel the document go to Step 4 lf the correct number is entered press ENTER L The transmission starts immedi ately if the phone line is avail able Sending Recovery Transmission continued D Select the Cancel Option
178. box is reg istered REGISTERED Setting Up a Relay Box continued 10 Enter the Number to send the Transmission Result continued 10b Enter the Number using the One Touch 10c Enter the Number using the Abbreviated Dial Number Key Press the desired One Touch Key Example One Touch Key 01 01 E TRANSMISSION REPORT ONE TOUCH gI The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds to indicate that the Mailbox is reg istered REGISTERED Press the desired Abbreviated Dial Number Then press ENTER lt SPEED DIAL The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds to indicate that the Mailbox is reg istered onl Enter the Abbreviated Dial Num ber TUV WXYZ E REGISTERED OO QG 38 OGO TRANSMISSION REPORT ABB NBR 001 Deleting a Relay Box This section describes the proce dures to delete an existing Relay Box in a DP120F DP125F hub unit 1 Display the MAILBOX 2 Select SETUP A 3 Select BOX 4 Enter the Box Menu DELETE DELETE Number Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 Select 4 BOX SETUP by Select 3 BOX DELETE by Enter the Box number max 20 73 view to select the desired pressing pressing digits of the Relay Box you Function Key want to delete Press 3 3
179. cceseseeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeneeeeetaeetee 116 OU OY E E A A A A A 124 Multi Polling Heport AA 211 Multi Polling Report Setting c ccceecceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeteaeeeee 200 N Notce to USCIS nce See ie atid ete a eee 1 O One Touch Key EE 78 Communication Options ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaaeeneneees 79 KE Une EE 97 Modifye earna Seege raa teceeeltetebbse cathe eege ebe 78 One Touch Number Uert 222 FROGISUIAUION EE 77 Operation Panel 13 FUNGCON TEE 15 Ozone Filter EE P Page GOuUnt eege a aa ae ee a Paper Jam Codes 0 ecccceecescceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeceaaeeseeaeeeseaaaeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeneaes Passwords see also Access Code and Security Code ITU Sub addresS AAA System Password tee ubieden ENEE Eed RUE Polling ENEE ee e ee ee Ee eat Rieti leie ee Le EE Continuous Polling Reception ceeeceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Delayed Polling Reception 0 eect eeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees Multi Address Polling Reception ceeeeseeeeeeeeestteeeeeeenaaes Secure Polling Reception ccccscceecseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees Simple Polling Reception cceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeeeeeeseeeeee Turnaround Polling Reception eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas Polling Reserv t n anisini eiii dae Ne ANE E aN Public Polling Reservation ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees Security Polling Reservation
180. ce down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Press MULTI ULTI GROUP 000 SPEED DIAL KEY OR ONE TOUCH KEY Enter the facsimile number of the remote party using any of the four dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 A screen like the one below is displayed e MULTI GROUP 000 ABB NBR 154 INFORMATION BUREAU pe 2 seconds S ULTI GROUP 001 T TO PREVIOUS ENTER MORE OR PRESS START NOTE If you select the same entry twice you are prompted to delete or retain that second entry Repeat this step until the fac simile numbers of all the desired remote parties are entered When the facsimile numbers of all the desired remote parties are entered go to Step 5 To cancel or modify the fac simile number already being programmed to a Manual Group Dial go to Step 4 Multi Key Quick Broadcast Transmission continued 4 Select the CANCEL or MODIFY Facsimile Number D Press the START Key You can cancel or modify the Manual Group Dial Number reg istered in this facsimile Select the number you want to delet
181. center to retrieve information and reports set various machine settings program data and upgrading the firmware in the machine A separate contract with the service center will be required to receive this RDC service NOTES e This capability is currently under development and is not yet available This RDC Service will be restricted to TOSHIBA trained technicians working for TOSHIBA authorized dealers and will not be available in all areas e This function is not available in the United States AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER Automatic Supplies Order Setting This machine can automatically send an order sheet to a designated fax machine informing your supplier that a replacement Drum Kit or Toner Kit is required Contact your local authorized dealer for information on this setting NOTE This function is not available in the United States SPECIFICATIONS Document Size Recording Paper Size Recording Paper Tray Capacity Effective Scanning Width Effective Printing Width Width 216 mm 8 5 inches max 148 mm 5 8 inches min Length 1000 mm 39 4 inches max 100 mm 3 9 inches min Width 216 mm 8 5 inches Length 280 or 356 mm 11 0 or 14 0 inches Up to 550 sheets per tray with the recom mended paper 216 mm 8 5 inches 207 mm 8 1 inches Compatibility Communication Modes Scanning Density Transmission Rate Encoding Systems Recording and Printing Method Laser
182. ch Key Repeat this step until all of the required remote station ad dresses are entered Then go to Step 8 NOTE e When the entered Abbrevi ated Dial Number or One Touch key has not been pre registered with a facsimile number the display shows the message NUMBER NOT LISTED Then returns to Step 5 e When the entered Abbrevi ated Dial Number or One Touch key is already as signed in this group the dis play shows the screens be low de GROUP NBR 0001 ALREADY ASSIGNED ABB NBR 118 DENVER OFFICE ABB NBR 118 CANCEL 2 RETAIN sE Go to Step 7a or Step 7b z EH 2 seconds To delete the existing remote station from this group press Q to CANCEL GROUP NBR 0001 ABB NBR 118 CANCELLED EE 2 seconds GROUP NBR 0001 ENTER ABB NBR OR OT ENTER TO COMPLETE Return to Step 6 To retain this remote station in this group press to RETAIN GROUP NBR 0001 TER ABB NBR OR O ENTER TO COMPLETE Return to Step 6 When all the stations necessary for this group are entered in Step 6 press ENTER lt GROUP NBR 0001 PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY TO ENTER OR ENTER TO SKIP To assign this group to a One Touch key press the desired One T
183. ct Another SETUP Item or Press GGG RECEIVE INTERVAL INTERVAL 0 15MIN Enter the interval value 0 to 15 in minutes Then press ENTER I OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode ECM Default Setting ECM Error Correction Mode is an internationally recognized er ror correction system It enables error free communications by automatically re sending any portion of the document affected by phone line noise or distor tion NOTES e Default ECM setting is ON e Both the sender and the receiver must have the ECM feature to perform ECM communications e This setting cannot be changed if a document is stored in memory Re sidual memory must be 100 e ECM is required for Su per G3 33 600 bps op erations If ECM is dis abled Super G3 opera tions are also disabled 1 Display the SET ECM Menu 2 Select the ECM Option Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU EE E EE TI ON 2 OPP Select the desired ECM option The LCD screen shown below is displayed for 2 second
184. ction allows up to 13 mm of the lower portion of the document to be discarded if the document is larger than the re cording paper To change this dimension contact your service repre sentative 1 Display the DISCARD Menu 2 Select the Desired Option Press MENU DISCARD 1 ON 2 OFF Select the desired option To set the DISCARD function to ON press To set the DISCARD function to OFF press OPERATION COMPLE el Reverse Order Printing Setting This function receives the entire Display the facsimile document into memory 1 REVERSE ORDER 2 Select the Desired and then prints the document in PRINT Menu Option reverse order In this way the pages of the document will be in Press Select the desired option correct order MENU To set REVERSE ORDER PRINT to ON Press To set REVERSE ORDER PRINT to OFF press OOOO REVERSE ORDER PRINT OPERATION COMPLE 1 0ON 2 OFF el Reception Multicopy Setting The DP120F DP125F can print multiple copies of the same re ceived document automatically You may select REVERSE OR DER PRINT to collate the re ceived document 1 Display the RX MULTI COPY Menu 2 Select the Desired Number of Copies Press f RX MULTI COPY COPY NUMBER 01 99 Ei Ente
185. ction of the By pass Tray Open the Top Cover remove the Developer Assembly and remove the jammed recording paper A paper jam has occurred within the Drum Developer section of the paper transport path Open the Top Cover remove the Developer Assembly and remove the jammed recording paper A paper jam has occurred within the paper exit section of the paper transport path Open the Top Cover remove the Developer Assembly and remove the jammed recording paper Error Codes Printed on Reports When an Error Code is printed as a status indication on Transmission Reports etc refer to the following description for the applicable Error Code to determine the cause Error Error Paper Empty Load recording paper and set the tray Recording Paper Jam Open the top cover and clear the recording paper jam Document Paper Jam Remove the jammed document Memory Overflow Wait until the memory is recov ered by completing some of the reserved jobs or remove other causes if any then retry the com munication If problem is continu al acquire additional memory Operation Panel or Top Cover Open Close the cover or the panel then retry Line Busy Send the document again Power Failure Retry the transmission or ask the remote party to transmit the docu ment again Security Mismatch in Relay or Mailbox transmission Confirm the remote party s securi ty cod
186. ctivate automatic Secure RX during a specified time pe riod press STOP Then press to return to the Standby Mode SECURE RX TIME PERIOD B2 00 09 00 Enter the time period start time and end time subject to auto matic activation using the fol lowing keys To enter the To move the entry point to the left or right Q desired nu meric value v Nx for each time digit QO CCL To change the time SE of day forward or Ly backward when the 12 hour system is used When the start time and end time or the desired period is dis played correctly press ENTER lt SET SECURE RX FOR 24HR OPERATION 2 NO You can also set Secure RX to ON for an entire 24 hour period e g Saturdays amp Sundays To set 24 HOUR SECURE RX for each day press Q To bypass setting 24 HOUR SECURE RX for each day press Go to Step 8 MONDAY 24HR SECURE RX 1 YES To set Secure RX for the entire 24 hour period for the day dis played press D To not set Press Repeat this step until you select YES or NO for each day of the week up to Sunday NOTE The day of the week is shown in line 1 of the LCD Selecting YES for Monday means Secure RX will be ac tive for the entire 24 hours of Monday The following is displayed for 2 seconds STOP Press to return to the Standb
187. cure RX Activation Period Setting an error will result upon press SECURERX ng C_ in the operation above The message NOT ALLOWED NOW will be dis played for 2 seconds then the screen returns to the Standby Mode SECURE RX 2 PRINT To print any documents re ceived into memory during Se cure RX press SECURE RX SECURITY CODE Enter the 4 digit security code GEI Y PQRS Tuv WXYZ UI A Then press ENTER 4 The screen below is displayed for 2 seconds to indicate that Secure RX Print is selected If there are any received docu ments in memory the DP120F DP125F will print the docu ments automatically upon se lecting Secure RX Print OPERATION COMPLE el TRANSMISSION OPTIONS Delayed Communication Time Designation This function is available to re serve a document for transmis sion at a programmed time This function is convenient for making use of non peak dis count telephone rates for do mestic and overseas facsimile transmissions Delayed commu nication can be applied to Single Transmissions to trans mit a single document to a specified destination Multi ad dress Group Transmissions Mailbox Transmissions Relay Transmissions and Polling Communication You can activate this option while programming an Abbrevi ated Dial Number page 70 or One Touch Di
188. d ID name will enable the remote party to identify the country from which the docu ment has been sent The 1st digit s following the sign is for the International Code If you send or receive docu ments to and from overseas se lect ADD by pressing If all of your documents are sent domestically select NOT NEEDED by pressing SET TERMINAL ID TEL NUMBER MAX20 The is displayed when ADD is selected If you selected ADD in Step 3 enter the International Code for your country before entering your area code and telephone number Example United States 1 Then enter the telephone num ber that has been connected to the facsimile Q JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ Check the LCD display to make sure your telephone number ap pears correctly then press ENTER If the Line 2 board is installed repeat Steps 3 and 4 for Line 2 then go to Step 5 INT CODE LINE 2 1 ADD 2 NOT NEEDED Terminal ID Setting continued 5 Select Another SETUP Item or Then press ENTER lt OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting
189. d in the LCD window Performing operations or settings by selecting menu items selected is called Menu Operation The menus use a multi layered structure Starting Menu Operation When the facsimile is in the MENU Standby Mode press 4 to start Menu Operation In the Standby Mode the dis play shows the date and time on the first row and the residual memory on the third row as shown below MAY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 Completing or Canceling Menu Operation When you have reached the end of a programming step or wish to cancel a programming STOP procedure press to re turn to the Standby Mode Keys Used in Menu Operation go E E START ENTER lt amp V gt D bo DG m D OO OG PQRS Tuv WXYZ Git STOP A Key Press this key to enter the Menu Operation or to scroll up the menu selection V Key Press this key to use the TONE function see page 118 or when in the Menu Operation press this key to scroll down the menu selection lt Key Press this key to display the preceding menu screen or to move the cursor to the left gt Key Press this key to display the sub menu screen or to move the cursor to the right ENTER Key or START Key When the currently highlighted item has sub items pressing this key operates the same as the gt Key When the currently highlighted item is the end item press thi
190. dial the desired party by searching for the name of the registered Location ID name in the Abbre viated Dial One Touch Dial and Group Dial List The document must be loaded and the resolution and contrast set before a transmission using Alphabet Dialing see page 89 2 Display the Name of the Desired Remote 3 Press the START DIAL Key Party Key Press Select the keyboard view on Use the following keys to select Once the desired name is dis SPEED DIAL the Flip Panel the LONDON OFFICE played press ENTE R SEARCH NAME AM E MAX20 Press the key on the keyboard which corresponds to the first letter of the name Example To find the location named LONDON OFFICE L Press CC or SHIFT E Dee Kl ENTER Then press Fees to display the screen for names beginning with L ENTER SEARCH NAME L A OFFICE N 00001 00003 NOTE More than one character can be entered for search A T ENTER SEARCH NAME LONDON OFFICE TI 00003 00003 START e The One Touch key or Abbrevi ated Dial Number and the name of the party appear on the LCD display for about 2 seconds Your facsimile will automatically start scanning the document into memory if enabled While scanning the facsimile dials connects and starts transmis sion ABB NBR 002 LONDON OF
191. ding paper jam your receptions will be safely stored in memory until the problem is corrected Memory Release Minimizes the potential for memory overflows when connected with a remote loca tion After each page has been successfully transmitted it is released from memory to make room for subsequent pages TOSHIBA Viewer Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer software that comes with the machine enables following functions see page 255 e 600 dpi plain paper laser printer PC print jobs are printed on plain paper at a crisp 600 dpi print resolution e Setting and programming the machine from a PC You can set up and program the machine from a PC e PC Scanner function The machine can be used as a Twain compatible B W image scanner 16 dots mm x 15 4 dots mm max User Test Mode The user test mode can help you to find the cause of a machine problem should a failure occur PCL Printing Option By installing the optional PCL Print Kit GA 1020 the machine can be used as a PCL printer Adding the optional NIC Kit GF 1010 enables to use the machine as a network PCL printer Internet Fax Function Option You can send a facsimile message via the internet by having the optional Internet Fax Kit GD 1040 and NIC Kit GF 1010 installed in the machine CARE AND MAINTENANCE About Power for the Unit This unit requires 120 V AC 60Hz electric power This unit should not be used in countries that do not conform to domestic power provision
192. down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Dial the facsimile number of the remote party using any of the four dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 STOP e Press if a dialing er ror occurs Example of screen displayed while a number is entered by Keypad Dialing COMM RESERVATION TEL NUMBER MAX128 0559761234 The facsimile starts scanning and storing the document into memory A File Number is assigned Residual Memory will decrease as the document is scanned STOP e Press to cancel the transmission operation SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 108 RESIDUAL MEMORY 97 When the document scanning is complete the facsimile returns to the Standby Mode MAY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 97 Direct Transmission Direct Transmission is used if there is not enough residual memory or when a large num ber of document pages are to be sent etc This mode is also useful if the operator wishes to visually con firm the actual transmission of the document to the remote par ty The documents will remain in the ADF and be
193. e or Evaluation or Demonstration or Training i Any other uses not included in Permitted Uses above which would require a licence to use the copyright in the software The license contained in this agreement will terminate automatically and without notice from Wordcraft International Limited if any provision in this agreement is not complied with GOVERNING LAW This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland LIMITED WARRANTY Wordcraft International Limited make no representations or warranties express or implied of any kind with respect to the contents of this package and specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Wordcraft International Limited s liability shall be limited to replacing any faulty product with alternative product or a cash refund up to but not exceeding the value of the monies paid for the product when originally purchased In no event shall Wordcraft International Limited or their suppliers be liable for any special incidental indirect or consequential damages whatsoever including without limitation damages for loss of revenue or profits business interruption lost or damaged data or any other loss arising out of the installation of use of or inability to use this software product Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible for any claims arising from the use of
194. e system password and your setup Error relating to the printer or mem ory Remove the cause of the error on the printer if any Then ask the re mote party to retry the transmis sion If not corrected call your ser vice representative Signal Error or Line Condition Error Retry the communication Fre quent failure may indicate a phone line problem If possible move the unit to another line and try your communications again File Error due to a Directory Error Power the unit ON OFF then retry STOP was pressed during the com munication Retry the transmission or ask the remote party to transmit the docu ment again Page Mismatch Check the actual document count Polling Error Check polling options setup securi ty code etc and check if the poll ing document exists No residual memory was remain ing on the remote party s machine for Relay or Mailbox transmission Retry the transmission Transmission Problems When transmissions are not performed normally check the points in the table below If the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or anything not listed here occurs call your service representative Problem Cause Solution When you place a doc ument in the document tray nothing happens When you press START Document Transmis sion Mode the mes sage DIALING or COMMUNICATING does not
195. e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 NOTE e If the day of month value entered in Step 2 does not exist in the current month the communica tion will start on the first day of the next month For example if 30 is entered in February the communication will start on March 1st Communication Report Print You can request a communica tion report every time a docu ment is sent If you desire a communication report every time you send a document set this function to ON as a default see page 195 If you plan to use communica tion reports only occasionally use this procedure The TX Re port key allows you to obtain a report for one communication only You can activate this option while programming an Abbrevi ated Dial Number see page 70 or One Touch Dial Key setting see page 77 if communication with a specific remote party al ways requires this option 1 Load the Document 2 Display the TX 3 Select the Option 4 Enter the Facsimile REPORT Menu Number Load the document face down Press To set the DP120F DP125F to Enter the number of the remote in the Document Tray see page TX REPORT always print a communication facsimile using any of the fol 88 report in any condition press lowing dialing methods Adjust the resolution and con CG e One Touch Key Dialing trast if desired see page 89 See page 97 e Abbrevia
196. e ENEE EEE SEENEN 28 T Telephone Handset Operation Optional 117 On Hook Dialing aeiia EAR e ENEE A 117 RROCHAUIAG ieee cecestee sence Redes Aisi denis it E e aie Secu de Na 118 THONG ee EE 118 Terminal iD cncv anteaters AE 34 Terminal ID Setting ccceceecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeeeceeeessaaaeeensaeeeseneees 42 Terminal ID Quick Stait as ees eiiancaiiede ENNEN NNN 34 Ee 240 Time and Date acaciae i itis EENS 40 Toner Cartridge Replacement cccccceeeseeeesecneeseeneeeeseaeeessaaeesecueeeeseaeees 28 TOSHIBA Viewer Browse Folders Add Edit Phoonebook contacts on the DP120F DP125F 275 Changing the Device Configuration ccseeeseeeeeteeeeeeee 270 Creating a Routing Rules 0 eeceeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 279 Creating Folder eu 281 Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders 00 100 280 Saving the Device Configuration cccceeeeeceseeeeeereeeeeteeeees 273 Saving the Phonebook ssesssesssisssrrrssrrrsssresrisssrrrsssrnnssenses 277 Computer Requirements sesseeesseeeeeeeeinesssrn retn tertnnssrnnsssrnnsrnn ene 261 Configuration Ofthe CID DBOM 261 Description of the Main Welcome Menu ccceesseeeeeeeeettteeeeeeees 269 Device Configuration cccccecceeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeseeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaees 261 Pile Scan enee eg ane ee ed ee ee 282 dE EE 262 Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer Device Setup 0 eeeeceececeeeeeeneeeeeeaee
197. e RINGER VOLUME Menu 2 Enter the Desired Volume Value Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU O 4 The current setting is highlight ed on the bottom row SET RINGER VOLUME VOLUME 0 7 0o123B 567 Enter the desired volume value 0 to 7 O for minimum 7 for maximum or Move the cursor to the desired position using the following keys Get When the desired value is dis played on the LCD display press ENTER OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other volume settings referring to their associated pages for instructions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Alarm Tone Volume Adjustment The alarm tone volume can be adjusted using the following pro cedure 1 Display the ALARM VOLUME Menu 2 Enter the Desired Volume Value Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU The current setting is highlight ed on the bottom row SET ALARM VOLUME VOLUME 0 7 012B4567 Enter the desired volume value 0 to 7 O for minimum 7 for maximum JKI z z D OO TUV WXYZ O OG or Move the cursor to
198. e Standby Mode Date and Time Setting This facsimile displays the cur rent date and time when in the Standby Mode It also uses this time for maintaining internal list and reports Follow the proce dure to set the time and date To display the SETUP menu press MENU 1 LANGUAGE 2 DATE amp TIME 3 TERMINAL ID 4 DIAL TIPE NOTE Only 4 selections can be displayed at one time 1 Display the DATE amp TIME Menu 2 Select the Time Format 3 Enter the Date Data 4 Enter the Time Data Highlight using LyY or 4 and press ENTER or SET TIME FORMAT 1 24 HOURS 2 12 HOURS Select the time format Q for 24 hour format for 12 hour format default The date and time currently set are displayed on the bottom row When 24 hour is selected SET DATE amp TIME MD DD YYYY WWW x XX XXXX XXX Allows 00 to 23 as the hour value When 12 hour is selected SET DATE amp TIME MD DD YYYY WWW Benn XXX Allows 01 to 12 as the hour value and designates AM or PM Move the cursor to the desired position using the following keys ES Enter the date TUV WXYZ Change the day of week desig nation by pressing the following keys WEE When the correct date is en tered press ENTER SET DATE
199. e Top Cover Drum Unit Drum Unit Press firmly down on the green Holding the Top Cover Release squares on the Drum Unit until Lever close the Top Cover the Drum Unit clicks into place then release the Lever Fuser Cleaner Installation 1 Open the Top Cover 2 Install the Fuser Cleaner 3 Close the Top Cover Top Cover Release Lever Fuser Cleaner es Aug L CH CH p i Ge Sg gt iG ONES eZ J 045 Grasp the Top Cover Release Lever to open the Top Cover Remove the new Fuser Cleaner from its plastic bag and install it positioning its white pad side down Holding the Top Cover Release Lever close the Top Cover then release the Lever PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT Toner Cartridge Replacement Replacement Toner Kits for your TOSHIBA facsimile include a Toner Cartridge and a Fuser Cleaner Be sure to replace the Fuser Cleaner when replacing the Toner Cartridge Your TOSHIBA facsimile has been designed to display a two stage alert to replace Toner once it has been depleted The first stage is a TONER LOW warning that alerts you that the Toner is low and should be replaced at your earliest con vince The unit will continue to receive and print facsimile messages during this stage The second stage is a TONER EMPTY notice When this mes sage is displayed the machine can no lo
200. e Touch keys or Group numbers Up to 50 abbreviated dial numbers or one touch keys or groups can be programmed For information on setting Relay Box see page 127 4 Due to advanced planning and setup requirements for the Relay Relay trans missions involving two or more Hub Stations transfers contact your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for detailed instructions How to Setup a Relay Transmission e Hub Station Create a Relay Box within a hub unit like the DP120F DP125F by following the procedures beginning on page 127 NOTE A Relay Box must be established for every possible unit if you wish to obtain a result report after the relay is completed e Originator Transmit a document to the hub unit from an ITU T relay compatible remote facsimile like the DP120F DP125F with the procedures beginning on page 134 Relay Transmission Relay Relay Transmission Overview e Haw ss Setup a Relay Relay Transmission e Hub Station 1 Register the facsimile telephone number of the Second Hub Station to a One Touch key or Abbreviated Number see pages 70 and 77 At this time the Relay Box Number located in the Second Hub Station should be registered as the SUB Address of the One Touch key or Abbreviated Number Create a Relay Box in the Hub Station see Setting Up a Relay Box Register the One Touch key or Abbreviated Number programmed in Step 1 to the Relay Box as the Second Hub Station e Second Hub Station 1 Register the
201. e of damaged paper could cause double feeding or paper jams Use of damp recording paper will cause poor printing over all or part of the image area If the paper is excessively moist print quality may become un even and voiding may occur Replace the paper should this condition exist 1 Pull Out the Paper Tray 2 Attach the Recording Paper Size Label 3 Press Down the Paper Pressure Plate 4 Prepare the Recording Paper Recording Paper Size Label 030 Pressure Plate 031 Pull the paper tray out using the handle located at the front of the tray Pull the tray straight out toward you as illustrated above CAUTION e Never place heavy objects on an open tray nor apply a strong force If not already at the correct pa per size insert the Paper Size Label into the slot of the Paper Tray See page 22 for information on changing the recording paper size Press the Paper Pressure Plate down until it clicks Prepare new recording paper sheets by holding both ends and flexing several times This will separate the sheets and provide optimum feeding Align the stack so that all four corners are neatly aligned Be sure to load the recording paper in accordance with any paper manufacturers printing side instruction Some papers have a preferred image side This image side should be placed face down in the paper tray Recording Paper Insta
202. e or modify using 4 or Zei and press ENTER lt L MULTI GROUP 1 CANCEL 2 MODIFY 3 RETAIN To select 1 CANCEL go to Step 4a To select 2 MODIFY go to Step 4b To select 3 RETAIN go to Step 4c 4a Cancel the Existing Number 4b Modify the Existing Number 4c Retain the Existing Number To cancel the existing number press to CANCEL MULTI GROUP ABB NBR 154 DELETED Return to Step 3 To modify the existing number press to MODIFY ULTI GROUP 001 TO PREVIOUS ENTER MORE OR PRESS START Go to Step 3 for the Facsimile Number entry To retain the existing number press to RETAIN ULTI GROUP 001 Tj TO PREVIOUS ENTER MORE OR PRESS START Return to Step 3 Press START D READING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR XXX ESIDUAL MEMORY 70 y When document scan ning is completed Standby Mode screen RELAY TRANSMISSION Relay Transmission Relay Relay Transmission Overview What is a Relay Transmission A relay transmission is used to send documents from your facsimile originator to a Hub Station which then sends them to additional end stations If you have several stations in one or more regional areas e g Los Angeles Metro New York City Dallas Ft Worth Seattle Tacoma etc you can s
203. e receiver with the TTI to be printed outside the sending data Accordingly if any characters exist near the top edge of the sending data the TTI and the sending data will not overlap in transmission e Off IMPORTANT NOTE The U S Federal Communication Commission FCC requires that anyone sending a facsimile message must identify themselves or company give their facsimile telephone number and provide the date and time of the transmission This information must be on the lead edge of at least the first page of the facsimile transmission 1 Display the TTI Menu Press MENU G EST 1 INSIDE 2 OUTSIDE 3 0FF TTI continued 2 Select the TTI Print Option Select the TTI Print option To select INSIDE press To select OUTSIDE press To select OFF press The display shows the screen below to indicate that the menu selection is accepted To return to the Standy Mode press STOP OPERATION COMPLETED Setting Recovery Transmission Recovery Transmission allows the operator to re transmit a document after failing the ini tially specified number of redial attempts If the Recovery Transmission is set to ON the document is stored in memory for a specified length of time You may retrans mit the document during this time period without re scanning the original document 1 Dep avis 2 Select the R
204. e sending proce dure was completed correctly but nothing happened Documents cannot be sent overseas Too many document pag es are set Set a maximum of 50 pages Letter size for one transmis sion sequence The Scanner Cover is not closed fully Close the Scanner Cover until it clicks at the two latching po sitions The document extension Tray is not fully extended Extend it fully to support the document sufficiently Something is wrong with the document paper itself Check the document to see if it satisfies machine require ments see page 87 The ADF pad is dirty The document was loaded with a wrong side down Clean the ADF pad Load the document face down The Scanner Cover is not closed fully The remote party s unit is not compatible with yours Poor telephone line condi tions Close the Scanner Cover until it clicks at the two latching po sitions Verify the remote party s unit This facsimile can communi cate with G3 machines but not G4 machines Retry sending the document using to the Quality Transmis sion procedure see page 184 Reception Problems When receptions are not performed normally check the points in the table below If the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or anything not listed here occurs call your service representatives Problem When you are to re ceive a document and you press
205. e the power of the fac simile ON Remove other docu ments from the Document Tray if any except the jammed por tion Press the Scanner Cover Re lease Button to open the cover Remove the jammed docu ment Check for pieces of pa per clips or staples which may have caused the failure Firmly close the Scanner Cover Confirm that the LCD display indicates that the facsimile is in the Standby Mode NOTE As for a document that has jammed in the facsimile make a duplicate using a copier and do the transmis sion over again with the new duplicate used as the send ing document Clearing a Recording Paper Jam If a recording paper jam occurs during a reception or a copying operation the message PA PER JAM XX is displayed in the LCD window Follow this procedure to clear the jam 1 Remove the 2 Open the Right Side 3 Open the Top Cover A Remove the Developer Assembly G Right Side 081 Cover Documents Cover with Drum Unit Top Cover Developer Document Release Lever ay Assembly 051 Leave the power of the fac simile ON If a document is in the Docu ment Tray or Document Exit Tray remove the document Open the Right Side Cover and remove the jammed re cording paper if any Upon completion ensure both sides of the cover are com pletely closed Grasp the Top Cover Release Lever to open the Top Cover
206. each folder can contain sub folders 1 Select a folder where you want to create a folder in Select File New Folder 2 Type a name for the new folder Hew folder Zeie Hane Logr cd Click OK Type a brief comment describing for example the folder s intended use if required NOTE When you drag from a Windows Explorer to a TOSHIBA Viewer folder TOSHIBA Viewer only stores a reference to the file and document properties for the file i e The file itself is not copied into the TOSHIBA Viewer folder and will be opened from its original location when you open the reference to it within TOSHIBA Viewer If you drag from a TOSHIBA Viewer folder to another TOSHIBA Viewer folder TOSHIBA Viewer will normally copy the file to the target TOSHIBA Viewer folder However if the source references a file outside of the TOSHIBA Viewer folder structure i e was dragged in from a Windows Explorer folder only the reference to the external file is moved or copied If you open an image file omp jpg Dt pcx fax or fcs in the TOSHIBA Viewer and then select Save in Unimessage Pro folder fro the File menu the image file will always be stored in the TOSHIBA Viewer folder With TOSHIBA DP120F DP125F it is possible to download to and upload from mailboxes within a DP120F DP125F using drag and drop of items If your TOSHIBA DP120F DP125F supports these functions you will see folders within
207. ecovery 3 Enter the STORED TRANSMIT Menu Transmit Option TIME Press Select the Recovery Transmit Enter the stored time length 01 MENU GGG RECOVERY TRANSMIT 1 ON option To turn ON Recovery Transmis sion press Go to Step 3 To turn OFF Recovery Trans mission press Skip the procedure in Step 3 Your setting is now complete The facsimile will display the same screen shown in Step 3 RECOVERY TRANSMIT STORED TIME 01 24 OR to 24 in unit of hours gt D bi DEF MNO OO Git PQRS TUV WXYZ QQ Then press ENTER a L When completed the following screen is displayed Press STOP to return to the Standby Mode OPERATION COMPLE el Sending Recovery Transmission This operation is used to re send a document after the docu ment initially failed to be sent If recovery transmission is set to ON the document is stored in the DP120F DP125F for resend ing NOTE When Recovery Transmis sion is set to OFF an error tone and NOT ALLOWED NOW LCD prompt result when Recovery Transmis sion is selected When Recovery Transmis sion is set to ON but no documents are in the Recov ery Queue a NO ENTRY LCD prompt will result 1 SC 2 Select the Desired 3 Change the 4 Cancel the TRANSMIT Menu Job Facsimile Num
208. ed using an external telephone 1 Press the MONITOR Key 2 Press the REDIAL Key 3 Redial the Remote Party To enter the On hook Dialing Monitor Speaker Dialing mode press MONITOR ON HOOK TEL NUMBER Press REDIAL PAUSE The last number dialed is dis played The display varies de pending on the dialing method used The displayed number is imme diately redialed ON HOOK TEL NUMBER 0559761234 If no number is registered as a redial number the screen below is displayed for 2 seconds then returns to Step 1 ON HOOK NUMBER NOT LISTED When you hear the answering START tone press if the remote party answers the phone pick up the handset op tional Inform the remote party that you wish to send a docu ment Upon hearing the facsimile tone press START D When the transmission is com pleted the facsimile returns to the Standby Mode MAY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 Redialing continued Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory This function enables you to transmit a document after select ing it from the jobs reserved in memory waiting to be redialed NOTE If you are using Department Codes the initiating Depart ment Code must match for this operation to work 1 Press the REDIAL Key 2 Select the Job to be Redialed
209. ed with the self test report To print the self test re port refer to PRINTING A TEST RESULT on page 252 If the result of the ADF test is judged to be NG call your ser vice representative KEY TEST The key test checks key switch operation on the Opera tion Panel 1 Select the Key Test Menu 2 Check the Keys 3 Exit the Key Test Mode 4 Completed the KEY TEST Press MENU OHOHOHOHG KEY TES PRESS ALL KEYS EXCEPT STOP KEY Press all the key switches ex STOP SE el STOP If all the keys except have been detected the screen below is displayed KEY TES PRESS STOP KEY NOTE If you fail to press all of the keys on the operation panel including before press STOP ing D the result will be NG Press STOP The result of the key test OK or NG is displayed on the screen and the unit returns to the test item select screen of the individual test KEY TEST STOP Unless is pressed within 10 seconds after the screen in Step 2 is displayed the test result is judged to be NG NOTE STOP If you press before you press every other key the machine will reset to the Individual Test menu screen and no test result will be is sued The result of the key test can be confirmed with the self test report To print the self test re
210. eeeeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeseeeeeeesiaaeeeseaes 264 Installation earren lace ii aban dain EE 262 INTROCUCUIO NS vace cereesth elon rest ah wide aceasta ee eee ee 260 License Agreement 258 TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer Printing from TOSHIBA Viewer Ulnibad 284 Printing Other Application ceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeaes 285 Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer 268 Transmission JOUMNAI sr aerae a e a a a a 205 Setting BEE 195 Transmission OPTIONS cccceeeeeeceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaaeeseeeeesesaeeesenaeeeseaeees 181 Attaching a Cover Sheet 187 Communication Report Print ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseaaeees 182 Delayed Communication Time Designation ccceeeeeneeeeeees 181 Dialing with Sub AddressS 00 eceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeneeesenaaeeeeaes 185 me MONT N 200 EEeEdEENE ein laa an 193 Line Selectii EE Het TEE 189 Low Speed Transmission c ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee 184 Priority Trans missi ns airera aa eridi e aina r 183 Security Transmission ccceeeeeeee cence eeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeaeeeeeaeees 194 Send After Scan Temporarily ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeseceeeteneees 190 Setting the Page Count cccececceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaaeeeseaeeeeeaeees 192 TIPANSMISSION REPOS os ateina aga EN SEA AE A ASAA 207 lte Te E eene EE 226 Clearing a DocumentJam ceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesenee
211. eeeeseaaeeeseas 217 Preset Dialing Number Lists cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 218 Alkotigte derer eegene eae dagen erates csc eaters 218 Alphabetical Sort Uiet nssr ntnnnrnenssrenssennsenn 219 Abbreviated Dial Number List 0 0 0 0 eeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaaees 220 Group Number Let 221 OneTouch Number List wiiescctzeciedssarets anna eera aeniea hee 222 FUNGUO ASi EE 223 Menu EE 224 Power Failure List ssrin neteis a An EEE EEE Eege 225 SES EECHER 226 Error MGSSaGe S ssiiciniccodccstvisnnedbvevanctneoncnidanndesstanniuennintieet 226 Paper Jam Error Codes 0 ccccceccceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceaaeeeeeneeesseaaeeesaas 228 Error Codes Printed on Reports sssseeesssssesessrrssreserisssrrsssrnnssnnssrnn 229 Transmission Probleme 230 Reception Problems Au ege ele ebe i 231 Clearing a Document Jam eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteaeeeeeaaeeteeeeeeetaeees 232 Clearing a Recording Paper Jam 0 cccccccescceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeueeeeeeaeees 233 When the Recorded Image is not Clea cccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeessteeeeeeees 235 Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure cccccceeeeeeeeetteeteeeees 235 Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure ccccccccssseeeeesesseeeeeeeesnaees 237 USER TEST MODE eebe 240 AUTOMATIC TEST MODE cccssseeecccscssseeeeeenseeeseneeeneees 240 RK Ee E 240 INDIVIDUAL TEST MODE cccssssecssseecsssseeecsseeeesseeeene
212. eeesaaeeeseeeeeteneees 232 Clearing a Recording Paper Jam 233 Error Codes Printed on Reports cccccesececeeesceeseeeeeeeseneeesstaeeteeees 229 Error Messages nonsi riae aata EEA EAEAN 226 Reception Problems oecserieserorede a a a e 231 Transmission Problems aassssseessrsseesesrrnessrrrnnensrnnnnnestnnnnnnnnnennnnennaa 230 When the recorded image is NOt clear esssseesseeieseeerrresreerrsssrrnn TTI Transmit Terminal ID Print eresten earen ee EEEa EESE Turnaround Polling Reception 2 eeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeeetaeeeeeteaeeeeenea TX Report U User lntertace Operation eet het shat Seege daten ei ed gd eed edict lend e dAn biede eiae User Test Mode AUtOMatiC TCS EE INGIVIGU AI ESE EE EE Sege dE gees ee Seed eeh LED TOST enee Eet eg Ee Eu Ee Speaker TeSt Getra eian eaaa iara a Ee Eh RR EE Bd EE Printing a Test Rosul eeececceeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseeaaeeenenseeees V Volume Adjustment Alarm Re TEEN Bell RINQGS aa a a EAEE EA AAE AAE EAA E Eege Key Touch Long ee dE ENER irais dtid CO T EAEN Monitor TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION Copyright TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 2000 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED DP120F DP125F Printed in Japan
213. eeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeee Security Transmission ccccceeteeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeeeeestiaaeeee Send After Scan Default Setting r te Ati a aea aaa eee Temporarily 2 edad Eege ieee avd eee geen Separator Page Setting Copy Separator Page cccccccccccsescceecesseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeesseeseseeeessseeeaaees Facsimile Separator Page c cceccceceeneeceeeeeeeseeeeeecaeeeeeneeeessaaeeeseas 53 PC Print Separator Page 53 Setup Document Exit Tray ek 19 Facsimile Machine Installation cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeetnaeeeeeeteeee 18 Printing Supplies Installation cccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeetaeeteeees 20 le EE 34 Receh EE 34 UNPAackINg EE 16 User Interface Operation ccccceececceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeetaeetees 35 Simple Polling ug airian Bane ena ee ee 141 Simple Polling Reservation cccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeee 138 Special Character Table 36 ee tt NEE 253 Speed Dial see Abbreviated Number Sub Address Communication Dialing with Sub addresses ccceeceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeeeeesaaeeneaes 185 Using with Abbreviated Number Registration aseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennne 73 Using with One Touch Key Registration ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 79 Supplies Automatic Supplies Order ccccccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeceeesennees 254 Installation EE 25 Replacement ti aa iee
214. ees 241 INDIVIDUAL TEST Summary cceeccceccsecessseseeeseeeecsaeeesseeeeeeaeeeseas 241 ADE WEST ease eer ees 242 KETTES E 244 LED TEST ee eh tee EE A OES ho ee 245 Reine EE 246 SPEAKER TES T lenoe tess ege en sang tee E E AEAT 247 SWATCH PEST EG 248 DEST IN Een EE ties tcadatt sats Eeer 251 TEST RESULT wesicccviiccdasscacsnavcsasioatecoucnesouisontavncseuswnactuangubatani s 252 PRINTING a TEST RESULT aeiee aE e E 252 REMOTE SERVICE eege EE ebe 253 RDC Remote Diagnosis Configuration Service 253 AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER ccecceeeesesseeeseeseeneees 254 Automatic Supplies Order Setting ceccceeceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeetsaeeeeeeees 254 SPECIFICATIONS eiecceutveceeo geg SES egeESee RE 255 TT 256 HARDWARE OPTIONG c ccccssscnsseseeseeeeeseeeseeeeeees 256 TOSHIBA Viewer caiicicccceevec cc cccdaccsierecssccrsvcacaddetuvewacenes 257 B gt ite ee 287 FEATURES Super G3 High speed Communications Provides state of the art V 34 modem technology for worldwide compatibility at speeds up to 33 600 bits per second High Resolution 256 Level Halftone With a maximum resolution of 16 dots mm x 15 4 lines mm 406 DPI x 391 LPI and 256 level halftone precision drawings small size characters photographs etc are copied sent and received with exceptional clarity Open Network Mailbox Systems Your new TOSHIBA provides ITU T F code communication for Open Mailbox op eration
215. eeteeteeeeeneeeees 177 Secure RX Manual Activation c ccccccceeeceeeceeeeeeseneeeseceeeeteeeeeeenaaeeees 179 Secure RX Printese iire ANEREN tiie eee teens 180 TRANSMISSION OPTIONS cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 181 Delayed Communication Time Designation essseeeseeeee eeen 181 Communication Report Print 182 Priority Transmission 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeee cette eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeteeeeaeeess 183 Low Speed Transmission cccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseenneeees 184 Dialing with Sub AddresS cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeesnaneeteaes 185 Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet cccssccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeseaeees 187 Line Selection ce eeeceecceteeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaaeenee 189 Enabling or Disabling Send After Scan Temporarily ceecseeeees 190 Setting the Page Count cccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeneees 192 Eine Monitos oasa edad ideas iq ceili aetna ieee 193 Security Transmission eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeetaaeeee 194 LISTS AND REPORTS ge ebeegteegge Eege 195 LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS GETTING sen 195 Reception Journal Settings cccccceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeeeeeneeeeseeaeeeeas 195 Direct Transmission Report Setting cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenaeeesas 197 Memory Transmissio
216. eived by the Relay Station Time and Date the Relay request is received Relay Group Numbers Number of documents received to memory by the Re lay station Originator Terminal Name or Dial Number Mailbox Relay Box ITU T Compatible F code Communication List Issues a list of the documents reserved through the local e your own station and remote stations using the Open Mail box System ITU T Compatible MAILBOX RELAY BOX REPORT F code Communication PAGE 2001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBER1 12345678901234567890 at TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 Printing Procedure NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 MAILBOX To display the main menu BOX NBR TYPE PGS FILE NBR DATE TIME FROM press 12345678901234567890 CONFIDENTIAL BOX 025 001 MAY 15 22 30 12345678901234567890 MENU 1234 456 CONFIDENTIAL BOX 001 099 MAY 16 08 17 REMOTE 012 111 MAY 16 11 50 811234567 099 198 MAY 16 19 37 LOCAL HHEOOO BULLETIN BOARD 033 173 MAY 17 07 43 LOCAL j f TL COMM OPTIONS 2 LISTS 3 INITIAL SETUP Box No Mailbox Type File No 4 DEFAULT SETTING J Document Originator ID Date and Time the LOCAL ege Your Own Station Document was entered Other indication Remote station s ID To select 2 LISTS press Name or Dial Number Number of Document pages entered RELAY 1 FUNCTION RELAY BOX END STATION REPLY TO NUMBER
217. ent Group Name is dis played Skip to Step 5 To retain the existing Group press to RETAIN ENTER GROUP NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Return to Step 3 Enter the Group Name with up to 20 characters associated with the Group Number See page 36 for more informa tion on Character Entry When no name is entered in this step no name will be given to the Group Number When the name is displayed correctly on the LCD display press ENTER GROUP NBR 0001 TER ABB NBR OR O ENTER TO COMPLETE Enter the addresses of the re mote stations to be preset in the group If a remote station is assigned to a One Touch key press the One Touch key If a remote station is assigned to an Abbreviated Dial Number enter the number then press ENTER Example Abbreviated Dial Number 118 preset as DENVER OFFICE GE ENTER lt i GROUP NBR 0001 ABB NBR 118 DENVER OFFICE e Ate 2 seconds S GROUP NBR 0001 ABB NBR 118 TER ABB NBR OR O ENTER TO COMPLETE Group Number Registration continued Enter a Remote Station continued Za Cancel the Group Number Setting db Retain the Group Number Setting 8 Complete Group Station Entries Q Assign a One Tou
218. eport Issue Non issue Status Attached Facsimile Option Status if any Type of Sub address Issues a list of dial numbers of the remote stations assigned to One Touch Dial Keys Printing Procedure Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LIST PRINT C TELEPHONE NBRS LIST 2 ABB UMBERS 3 GROUP NUMBERS 4 ONE TOUCH NBRS To select 4 0NE TOUCH NBRS press 2 FUNCTION LIST DIAL TYPE LINE1 DIAL TYPE LINE2 CALL NUMBER KEYBOARD TYPE MEMORY SIZE MACHINE SETTING RINGER VOLUME ALARM VOLUME KEY TOUCH VOLUME MONITOR VOLUME SUPER POWER SAVER PRINTER POWER SAVER START TIME END TIME FAX SEPARATOR PAGE COPY SEPARATOR PAGE PC SEPARATOR PAGE SEPARATOR PAGE TRAY ACCOUNT CODE PRINT DENSITY DOCUMENT LENGTH LINE MONITOR RECEIVE INTERVAL ECM DOCUMENT MODE CONTRAST COLLATED COPY LETTER HEAD PAPER REDIAL MODE INTERVAL REDIAL MODE COUNTER AUTO RECEIVE MODE RING DELAY AUTO RECEIVE MODE LINE2 TX SETTINGS MEMORY TX SECURITY TX COVER SHEET RECOVERY TX TEL SEND AFTER SCAN MF MF QWERTY 8MB BPW vs MANUAL ON 00 00 00 00 OFF OFF OFF AUTO OFF 0 lm OFF 3MIN ON gt STD NORMAL OFF OFF 1MIN 5 AUTO L TX RX ON OFF OFF OFF INSIDE OFF PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 N
219. er completing this Configura MENU position using the following tion Setting you may continue GGG SET PRINT DENSITY DENSITY 2 TO 2 LIGHTER DARKER 2 1 1 2 keys 2 to 2 2 for lighter print 2 for darker print E When the desired value is dis played on the LCD display press ENTER lt OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Document Length Setting This setting enables or disables the DP120F DP125F sending documents longer than 1 Meter 39 4 The default setting en ables a 1 Meter 39 4 limit 1 Display the DOCUMENT LENGTH Menu 2 Select the Document Length Option Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU DOCUMENT LENGTH Telm 2 UNLIMITED Select the Document Length op tion To select 1m press 3 To select UNLIMITED press OPERATION COMPLETED Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the C
220. ervation can be set at one time e Simple Polling reserva tion is not available if a document is reserved in the Public Mailbox 1 Load the Document 2 Display the POLLING Menu 3 Select POLLING RESERVE 4 Select POLLING Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press POLLING POLLING 2 POLLING RESERVE 3 PROG CONT POLL Select 2 POLLING RESERVE by pressing POLLING RESERVE 1 POLLING 2 PUBLIC FAX MAILBOX Select 1 POLLING by press e CURITY CODE TEL NO S T ECURITY CODE EL NO 2 3 4 CODE amp TEL NO Simple amp Security Polling Reservation continued DN Select the Security Option 6a Select SECURITY CODE 6b Select TEL NO 6c Select CODE amp TEL NO 7 Complete the Procedure Use the Dial Keypad to select one of the following options or use SE Zei to scroll up down the menu and press ENTER 1 NO Select this option if you do not want to use security Go to Step 7 2 SECURITY CODE Select this option to use a 4 digit
221. es See page 138 e Public Mailbox Documents can be reserved for multiple polling operations using the facsimile s memory so that any facsimile with polling capabili ties can remotely retrieve the document See page 140 Polling Reception is the ability to call up another facsimile and re motely retrieve a document stored within the remote facsimile The following types of polling receptions are available e Simple Polling The DP120F DP125F can call any other facsimile with polling reservation capabilities to remotely retrieve a document See page 141 Secure Polling The DP120F DP125F can call another TOSHIBA facsimile with security polling reservation capabilities to remotely retrieve a document using a 4 digit security code See page 141 e Multi Address Polling Multi Address Polling allows the DP120F DP125F to sequentially poll multiple remote facsimiles using a group of facsimile num bers stored as a group directory or as a MULTI key operation See page 143 e Continuous Polling Continuous Polling permits the DP120F DP125F to sequentially dial and retrieve documents from a group of facsimile numbers on a continuous basis See page 145 e Turnaround Polling Turnaround Polling allows the DP120F DP125F to transmit docu ments to a remote facsimile and then poll documents from the remote facsimile on the same phone call See page 147 e Delayed Polling Delayed Polling permits the DP120F DP125F to poll a document s from
222. facsimile telephone number of the End Sta tion to a One Touch key or Abbreviated Number see pages 76 and 77 2 Create a Relay Box in the Second Hub Station see Set ting Up a Relay Box Register the One Touch key or Abbreviated Number programmed in Step 1 to the Relay Box as the End Station e Originator Transmit a document to the hub unit from an ITU T relay compatible remote facsimile like the DP120F DP125F with the procedures beginning on page 134 Setting Up a Relay Box This section describes the pro cedures to setup a Relay Box in the DP120F DP125F hub unit Using this function all ITU T F code compliant facsimiles can receive or transmit documents to and from the DP120F DP125F Relay Boxes must be setup prior to utilizing the DP120F DP125F as a Relay Box Hub For more information see page 126 You can assign a maximum of 50 End Stations using Addrevi ated Dial Numbers One Touch Keys or Group Numbers 1 Display the MAILBOX Menu 2 Select SETUP amp DELETE Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press ITU MAILBOX C MATLBOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP Select 4 BOX SETUP by pressing SETUP MAILBOX 1 COMPLETE 2 BOX SETUP 3 BOX DELETE Setting Up a Relay Box continued 3 Select BOX SETUP 4 Select the RELAY
223. fied personnel may open covers or remove WCCO EE ae ie parts that are not explicitly shown and described in the Operator s NEIE SE Ga D e S Jack No SE E Manual as being accessible to the Operator SE Ee NO This Class A digital apparatus s oer Canadian Interference Causing T sl E t Regulations S MM TE E oe op SES classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le TOSHIBA TEC ES E mat riel brouilleur du Canada CONTENTS NOTICE TO USERS iiicnhecnsccuensdtezatocdtezstaciensteredaxntextdanpserataptecet 1 NOTICE TO USERS ianiai hasiren acted tecnieceii es aaeain naidaan tiani 2 OZONE SAFETY INFORMATION nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 LASER SAFETY INFORMATION cscsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 FEATURES ee 8 CARE AND MAINTENANCE cccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeneseeseeeseeeeees 9 INTRODUCTION WE 10 FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 Pront EE 10 e ET 11 When Optional Recording Paper Trays are Installed ceeeeees 12 OPERATION PANEL s s sseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseesseeeeees 13 SETUP occa citer ecnntthboccesedcencivssssicecteeatcnatectenaoeecewsebsineeseate 16 UNPACKING E 16 FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION ccccccccccceeeeeeeees 18 Connecting Your TOSHIBA Facsimile 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeteeteeteeeeeneeees 18 Recording Paper Exit Tray 19 Document Exit Tray NENNEN t a ecb o i d 19 Charger Cleaner Mylar Scr
224. first Call your service representative for assistance Remove the Developer Assem bly with the Drum Unit at tached IMPORTANT e Never touch the photo conductive drum the green surface of the Drum Unit If the surface is scarred or scratched it will cause print quality problems e Do not expose the pho toconductive drum of the Drum Unit to light for more than 3 minutes lf the Drum Unit is to be left anywhere outside the facsimile be certain to cover it with cloth pa per etc Wipe the glass surface of the laser unit with a soft dry cloth lens cleaner cloth Clean the Transfer Wire and Discharge Wire with a cotton swab CAUTION Do not touch the Transfer Wire and Discharge Wire with your hands The oils from your hands could con taminate the wire resulting in lower print quality Wipe the Paper Guide with a dry cloth When the Recorded Image is not Clear continued Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure continued 6 Clean the Front Contacts 7 Clean the Right Contacts 8 Clean the Rear Contacts Q Separate the Drum Unit 10 Clean the Charger Wire oss I Developer Assmbly Charger Cleaner Clean the silver contacts found along the front of the developer chassis using a cotton swab Using a cotton swab clean the silver contacts found along the right side of the developer chas sis
225. g paper is not installed correctly Check the paper installation and make sure it is correct The paper tray is not posi tioned properly The original document on the sending side is of poor quality Slide the paper tray into the slot firmly Ask the sending party if the document contents are clear enough The sending unit requires adjustment Ask the sending party to take a copy of the same document using their facsimile If the quality is poor the problem is in the sending party s unit The recording unit re quires cleaning The remote party loaded the document face up The recording paper tray is not firmly closed If a copy is made on your fac simile and the quality is poor clean the recording unit Request the remote party to make sure that document is loaded correctly Check the tray Something is wrong with the recording paper itself Use the recording paper of de sired specifications The right side cover is not firmly closed Check the right side cover Clearing a Document Jam If a document jam occurs dur ing a transmission the mes sage DOCUMENT JAM is displayed in the LCD window Follow this procedure to clear a document jam 1 Remove Other Documents 2 Open the Scanner Cover 3 Remove the Jammed Document 4 Close the Scanner Cover Document Scanner Cover Release Button Leav
226. ge press 2 To turn OFF Copy Separator Page press PC SEPARATOR PAGE TI ON Setting Separator Page continued 4 Select the PC Print Separator Page Option DN Select the Tray Option Select Another SETUP Item or To turn ON PC Print Separator Page press Q To turn OFF PC Print Separator Page press If no Optional Recording Paper Tray is installed following screen is displayed OPERATION COMPLETED Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen Go to Step 6 If any of FAX Separator Page Copy Separator Page or PC Separator Page is set to ON and an Optional Recording Pa per Tray is installed following screen is displayed TRAY SELECTION 1 LOWER TRAY 2 AUTO SELECT NOTE When the two Optional Re cording Paper Trays are in stalled the same screen is displayed Go to Step 5 To print the Separator Page from the Lower Recording Paper Tray press To print the Separator Page from a Paper Tray selected au tomatically press NOTE In case AUTO is selected separator page is printed on Letter size paper If Letter size is empty Legal size pa per is selected OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue
227. has not been previously used and the following menu is displayed skip to Step 6 C ONE TOUCH 03 ID NAME MAX20 Pe 2 seconds ENTER NAME ID NAME MAX20 If the pressed One Touch key has already been registered with a telephone number the following information appears on the LCD display ONE TOUCH 03 ALREADY ASSIGNED ABB NUMBER 012 FRISCO OFFICE yee 2 seconds ONE TOUCH KEY 1 CANCEL 2 MODIFY 3 RETAIN S ENTRY One Touch Dialer Registration continued DN Change One Touch Information 6 Enter the Location ID Name You can cancel or retain the One Touch key once registered into the facsimile CANCEL Deletes the information stored in the selected One Touch key It will also re move the number from all associated Group Dialing Di rectories MODIFY Allows you to change the re mote facsimile number and or associated Location ID name This selection is rec ommended if the location is used in Group Dialing Direc tories RETAIN Retains the selected One Touch key information with out modification 5a Cancel the One Touch Assignment 5b Modify the One Touch Assignment 5c Retain the One Touch Assignment To cancel or delete the One Touch key assignment press 3 to CANCEL ONE TOUCH KEY ENTRY O
228. he Relay Transmission was performed successfully Group Number Relay Station Name or Number End Terminal One Touch or Abbreviated Dial Numbers NOTE The format sample above is obtained when a Relay Transmission was performed with Group designations When a Relay Transmission is performed with individual designations the Group Number print is skipped This is the result report the Originating Terminal prints after a Relay Transmission Printing Procedure Auto Print if programmed see page 201 Printing will automatically start after the originating sta tion transmits to all of the assigned relay stations suc cessfully or unsuccessfully Relay Transmission Relay Station Report RELAY TX RELAY STATION REPORT FILE NUMBER DATE DOCUMENT PAGES START TIME END TIME SUCCESSFUL GROUP NUMBER m 0012 UNSUCCESSFUL 01 ONE TOUCH NUMBER DIT MAY 17 10 55 IS MAY 17 10 56 PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 NAME 001 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 MAY 17 14 18 RECOVERY TIME MAY 17 15 18 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ OT ABB 02 03 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 PAGES SENT 000 Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was not completed SENT PAGES Number of pages sent normally Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmiss
229. he Standby Mode SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 231 RESIDUAL MEMORY 90 Reserving a Document to a Mailbox Local Hub This section describes the pro cedure to reserve a document to the DP120F DP125F s Confi dential Box or Bulletin Board Box NOTE Before a document can be reserved to a mailbox that mailbox must first be setup See page 149 Load the Document 2 Display the MAILBOX Menu 3 Select the Mailbox Type 4 Select INPUT TO MAILBOX Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press ITU MAILBOX MAILBOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP Select the desired type of Mail box To reserve the document to a Confidential Box press Q CONFIDENTIAL 1 PRINT MAILBOX 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX 4 INPUT TO MAILBOX 5 CANCEL MAILBOX To reserve the document to a Bulletin Board Box press BULLETIN BOARD 1 PRINT MAILBOX 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX 4 INPUT TO MAILBOX 5 CANCEL MAILBOX Select 4 INPUT TO MAILBOX by pressing NOTE You may use 4 Lex to scroll
230. he cursor to the desired position using the following keys Get Enter the time period TUV WXYZ Change the AM PM designation if selected by pressing the fol lowing keys Eeer When the correct time period is displayed press ENTER lt OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds The display returns to Step 1 After completing this Configura tion Setting press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Setting Separator Page A Separator Page is a sheet automatically inserted between each received fax copy and or PC print This feature makes it easier to distinguish between individual receptions copies and PC prints NOTE If you have already selected a Paper Tray for the Letter Head Paper setting this function is not available Separator Page aol XXXX SEPARATOR PAGE HEHHHH PAGES COPIED 001 Separator Page 1 Display the o Select the Facsimile 3 Select the Copy SEPARATOR PAGE Separator Page Separator Page Menu Option Option Press To turn ON Facsimile Separator To turn ON Copy Separator MENU 0006 FAX SEPARATOR PAGE IL ON 2 OFF Page press Q To turn OFF Facsimile Separa tor Page press COPY SEPARATOR PAGE TI ON Pa
231. he image here may be your company logo etc It can be preset by scanning using the Cover Sheet Function setting operation on page 165 If no image is scanned for this purpose this area is left blank Cover Page Title fixed Date this document was re served Subtitle printed for retransmis sion only Remote Name which was en tered using this operation Dialed Facsimile Number first 38 digits Your Name which was entered using this operation Your Facsimile Number max 20 digits Number of document pages to be transmitted Line Selection This option allows you to select the phone line to be used for a transmission if this facsimile is equipped with the 2nd Line Board You can activate this option when programming an Abbrevi ated Dial Number see page 70 or One Touch Dial Key see page 77 if the communication with a certain remote party al ways requires this option NOTE Line 2 is available for trans mission if Line 2 has been set for Transmission Recep tion see page 69 In addi tion if Line 2 is set for recep tion only with timer trans missions are only possible when the timer has expired 1 Load the Document 2 Display the TEL LINE SELECT Menu 3 Select the Desired Option 4 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89
232. he list of available folders To open a folder in the right pane click its name in the folder tree If a folder contains any unread items TOSHIBA Viewer will display the number of unread items within each folder after each folders name in this section of the screen e On the right is a display area for individual or multiple folder You can select folders to be displayed by clicking on them in the folder list Changing the Device Configuration During the Unimessage Device Wizard that con cluded the installation process you will have configured TOSHIBA Viewer for use with your DP120F DP125F Should you want to you can reconfigure how TOSHIBA Viewer works with your DP120F DP125F via the Device folder Also you can configure the configuration using program remotely device this 1 Open the Device folder Double click the appropriate entry in the list of devices that appears in the right hand pane Device settings appears Browse Folders continued Changing the Device Configuration continued 2 Change the TOSHIBA Viewer settings 2a Change the device settings 2b Change the port Click on Device tab Check on Print and or Scan if you want the DP120F DP125F to be worked as a printer and or scanner using the TOSHIBA Viewer When you want to change the port go to Step 2b When you want to configure the device settings click on Setup and go to Step 3 W
233. he power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropri ate The Ringer Equivalence Number of your facsimile is 0 3 NOTICE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 TOSHIBA OF CANADA LIMITED Office Product Group 191 McNABB STREET MARKHAM ONTARIO L3R 8H2 AVIS L tiquette d Industrie Canada identifie le mar riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme aux normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications comme le prescrivent les documents concernant les exigences techniques relatives au mat riel terminal Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communication
234. hed facsimile and reads the current settings You can store the settings within TOSHIBA Viewer or save them as a file on your hard disk This is useful when performing a full memory clear or upgrading the machine s firmware because you can easily re configure the device by downloading the stored settings 1 Open the Device folder L e tE 1 Double click the appropriate entry in the list of devices that appears in the right hand pane Device settings appears 2 Click on Setup Toshiba Setup appears Browse Folders continued Saving the Device Configuration continued 3 Create the new settings file 4 Save new settings Viste kee ay fas mer Chae m y pig Di D 7 L E E d ia a i WW Bra E Double click on Add settings file A New settings file is created Enter an appropriate name for the new settings file To copy the device configuration to the new settings file left click and hold on the device settings file e g TOSHIBA then drag it to the new settings file e g DP125F LA Office and release the left mouse button NOTE Initially your mouse pointer will become a circle with diagonal line Upon reaching the desired set tings file the pointer will take the form of an ad dress label Upon releasing the left mouse button the contents of the device settings file are copied to the new settings file
235. hen you want to save changes click on OK Click on Port tab Select the port that your computer connects to your DP120F DP125F Click on OK to save changes Browse Folders continued Changing the Device Configuration continued 3 Change the Device settings You can remotely configure the device settings using the TOSHIBA Viewer After clicking Setup on the Device Tab screen the TOSHIBA Viewer retrieves the device settings from the DP120F DP125F When you want to change the device settings file directly go to Step 3a When you want to change the device settings file by copying the settings from a set file lo cated on your hard disk go to Step 3b When you want to change the device settings file by copying the settings from a user set tings file stored within TOSHIBA Viewer go to Step 3c For additional information on a specific item refer to Help and the appropriate section of the DP120F DP125F Operator s Manual 3a Edit the device configuration 3b Load a set file on your hard disk W eGeggs K G tt p D i d 0000 Select or enter the value for items that you want to change the configurations Click the v button to download the new settings to your DP120F DP125F Back to Step 2a NOTE Click the X button to cancel adding editing the device configu ration Back to Step 2a oee oe Double click on Add settings file
236. ial NOTE For more information on when to use SUB SEP PWD refer to page 75 If you des ignate an erroneous or un necessary sub address the communication will result in an error Load the Document 2 Display the SUB ADDRESS COMM Menu 3 Select the Option 4 Enter the SUB Address Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 13 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press SUBADDRESS COMM CS SUB ADDRESS COMM 2 SUB 3 SEP 4 PWD Select one of the following op tions from the menu To select SUB press Go to Step 4 To select SEP press Go to Step 5 To select PWD press oS Go to Step 6 To complete press Go to Step 7 this procedure Enter the required SUB address max 20 digits then press ENTER The display returns to the screen at the bottom of Step 2 You may continue from Step 3 and enter another sub address of a different type To complete your sub address entry select option 1 COMPLETE in Step 3 SUB ADDRESS COMM SUB MAX20 Dialing with Sub Address continued 5 Enter the SEP Address 6 Enter the PWD d Complete the Sub
237. idual memory becomes zero during a Memory Reception document reception will stop and no further receptions are possible until memory be comes available 1 Display SET MEMORY RX Menu 2 Select the Memory Reception Option Press MENU GP SET MEMORY RX 2 OFF Select the Memory Reception Option To set the Memory Reception ON press 2 To set the Memory Reception to OFF press When the setting is complete the following screen is dis played To return to the Standby STOP Mode press o OPERATION COMPLE el Secure Reception Access Code Setting There are occasions when you may wish to secure access to incoming documents Secure RX allows you to receive docu ments to memory until a security code is entered This ensures that only users with the correct security code may retrieve documents In addition the Se cure RX can be setup to auto matically be activated during a specified time period To setup Secure RX a 4 digit security code must be pro grammed first After program ming the security code you can specify the time period during which the Secure RX will be ac tive 24 hour coverage for spe cific days of the week is select able This section describes the procedure for programming a security code or changing an existing security code 1 Display the SECURE RX Menu 2 Select the Option
238. ing Procedure Auto Print if programmed see page 198 Printing will automatically start after a transmission is completed Reservation List RESERVATION LIST PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBERI 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 TX RX FILE NBR FUNCTION PGS MAIL DATE TIME TO 001 MULTI TX 003 AAY 16 11 55 TEL NBR 123456789012345678901234567890 1234567890 ABB NBR 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 GROUP 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 005 POLLING RX AAY 16 22 50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST 009 RELAY STATION 001 OT NBR 01 010 MULTIPOLLING AY 16 22 25 GROUP 1001 1002 1999 POLLING FAX MAILBOX FILE NBR FUNCTION PGS MAIL DATE TIME TO 961 POLLING 099 MAY 13 7 30 RECOVERY TX FILE NBR FUNCTION PGS MAIL DATE TIME TO 970 SINGLE TX MAY 15 14 20 23 4567 PC JOB FILE NBR FUNCTION PGS MAIL DATE TIME TO Box Number d Type of in case of Mailbox Destination ee communication Name or Dial Number of the communication Remote Party File Number of the communication Number of Pages Designated Time or Time of Reception This is a listing of the communi cation jobs now reserved in memory Printing Procedure Manual Print Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press RESERVATION LIST Multi Address Transmission Report MULTI TRANSMISSION REP
239. inted after recovery from a power fail ure event TROUBLESHOOTING Error Messages If an abnormal condition arises in the facsimile or an incorrect operation is performed an alarm buzzer is generated for about 4 seconds and a mes sage to indicate the nature of the error appears in the LCD window In that case take cor rective action according to the following table Error Message Cause Solution a O Error Message Cause Solution e O BROKEN REGISTRATION POWER FAILURE SCANNER COVER OPEN TOP COVER OPEN ENTRY MEMORY FULL O O Autodialer numbers and initial setting have been lost due to a long period of power failure etc STOP Press to restore the idle state If this Error Message is repeatedly displayed machine programming has become cor rupted The machine must be re initialized by a trained techni cian Call for service A power failure occurred during a communication etc The con tents of memory were cleared due to a long power off condi tion A Power Failure List is printed Confirm the list contents see page 225 The scanner cover is open Firmly close the scanner cover The top cover is open Firmly close the top cover The memory set aside for speed dial numbers i e One Touch Keys and Abbreviated Dial Num bers has been exhausted Delete unneed numbers alter nate numbers and unnecessary pauses Use shorte
240. ion Dial Number Alternate Dial Number SUB SEP or PWD Type of Sub address Designated Time Line Monitoring Communication Speed Limit x 100 TX Report Issue Non issue Status Attached Fax Option Status if any Issues a list of remote station dialing numbers assigned as Abbreviated Dial Numbers Printing Procedure Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LIST PRINT m TELEPHONE NBRS LIST 1 BY NAME 2 ABB UMBERS 3 GROUP NUMBERS d ONE TOUCH NBRS 5 ALL REPORT To select 2 ABB NUMBERS press Preset Dialing Number Lists continued Group Number List GROUP NUMBER INFORMATION GROUP NUMBER NAME PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 NAME OT ABB NUMBER OO1 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 0001 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST 1111 ABBCCCDDDDEEEEE 1999 ZZZZZ OT ABB ABB OT ABB 01 02 Le 4 001 002 016 017 031 032 100 200 3 32 995 996 03 04 05 06 O7 O08 O09 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 033 034 999 300 400 500 338 997 998 999 Group Number Group Name One Touch Key Numbers and Abbreviated Dial Numbers belonging to the Gro
241. ion was performed successfully Group Number Relay Station Name or Number End Terminal One Touch or Abbreviated Dial Numbers NOTE The format sample above is obtained when a Relay Transmission was performed with Group designations When a Relay Transmission is performed with individual designations the Group Number print is skipped This is the Relay Station result report output by the Relay Sta tion and printed after a Relay Transmission Printing Procedure Auto Print if programmed see page 202 Printing will automatically start after the relay station in a relay operation completes all of the transmissions as signed to it successfully or unsuccessfully Relay Transmission End Terminal Report This is the End Terminal result report sent from the Relay Sta tion to the Originating Terminal and printed by the Originating RELAY TX END TERMINAL REPORT Terminal PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBER1 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 Printing Procedure NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 FILE NUMBER 3 013 mare Ayia aE Auto Print if programmed see page 203 DOCUMENT PAGES 15 Printing will automatically E PME E eh ep start after the relay station s report on the success or fail END TIME S MAY 17 14 18 RECOVERY TIME MAY 17 14 10 kee ure of the individual commu SUCCESSFUL nications in the relay opera tion GROUP NUMBER
242. irectories see pages 98 99 and 123 12 REDIAL PAUSE Key Press this key to redial a facsimile telepnone number if the number was busy on your first try see page 110 Or use this key to enter a pause between telephone digits when entering a remote facsimile number 13 MONITOR Key Used to enable the speaker monitor for monitoring call progress during non memory document feeder transmissions see page 106 14 START Key Press this key to start facsimile communication This key is also used to complete programming 15 STOP Key Used to stop an operation or cancel system programming This key is also used to clear an error condition 16 COPY Key Press this key with a document in the Document Tray to copy a document see page 95 17 TX REPORT Key Press this key to request or disable a Transmission Report for your current trans mission job 18 MODE Key and FINE U FINE HALFTONE Lamps Selects the desired resolution for transmission or copying When Standard mode is selected none of the MODE lamps will be illuminated see page 89 MENU 19 Menu Keys 47 LIS ee TONE These keys are used to scroll and highlight desired LCD menu prompts see page 35 The Lys is also used as the TONE Key The Lys key is helpful to access TONE TONE various services requiring touch tone dialing when you are connected to a Rotary line see page 118 20 ENTER Key Press this key to enter a selected menu item or select a menu e
243. isplay the main menu press MENU sa 1 COMM OPTIONS 2 LISTS 3 INITIAL S 4 DEFAULT S UP TINGS J e T 5 MENU LIST 9 TEST MODE To select 5 MENU LIST press Power Failure List POWER FAILURE LIST PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBERI 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 TX RX FILE NBR FUNCTION 001 MULTI TX 005 POLLING RX 006 PRG CONT POLL 010 MULTI POLLING POLLING FAX M BOX MAIL BOX FILE NBR FUNCTION MAIL FROM DATE TIME 101 POLLING LOCAL MAY 16 11 23 106 CONFIDENTIAL BOX 1234567890 12345678 9999999999999 MAY 17 07 55 107 BULLETIN BOARD 123 999 LOCAL MAY 17 07 55 MEMORY RECEPTION FILE NBR FUNCTION MAIL FROM TO DATE TIME 222 1234567890123456789 MAY 16 21 37 RECOVERY TX FILE NBR FUNCTION 333 SINGLE TX Type of communication Station where the communication or the Time of Input File Number of the communication Box Number communication in case of Mailbox Mailbox is input This facsimile has a battery to back up the document memory contents However when the power is turned off for a lengthy period due to a power failure etc the communication data stored in memory will be cleared A list of the File Num bers of those cleared communi cations will be printed Printing Procedure This list is automatically pr
244. ission Mode 3 Select YES 4 Dial the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press DIRECT TX DIRECT TRANSMIT 1 YES 2 NO Select 1 YES by pressing 2 COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 F ER TEL NUMBER 4 Dial the facsimile number of the remote party using any of the four dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Direct Transmission continued On hook Transmission Monitor Speaker Dialing You can send your documents with On hook Dialing using the monitor speaker to confirm the answering tone from the remote party s facsimile 1 Load the Document 2 Press the MONITOR Key 3 Dial the Facsimile Number 4 Press the START Key Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AAY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER
245. ities Tel Line Select Default first available Specifies which tel line is se lected when the 2nd Line is installed Ya Select the Communication Option To select the most popular set tings skip this step recom mended and return to Step 3 by pressing To specify the Communication Options press 2 When 1 YES is selected the COMM OPTIONS screen ap pears Follow the next steps for each item selection COMM OPTIONS 2 DELAYED COMM 3 TX REPOR 0 LINE MONITOR QUALITY TX S a UB ADDRESS EL LINE SELECT YAN OS These items are outside the LCD frame To view them use the w scroll key One Touch Dialer Registration continued 9 Select Communication Options continued 9b Complete the Option Setup 9c Delayed Communications 9d Transmission Report Ye Line Monitor Speaker 9f Quality TX If you have completed the de sired Communication Options setting for this One Touch key select COMPLETE by pressing 2 Return to Step 3 PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE To designate a specific time at which operations using this One Touch key will be dialed press DELAYED COMM TIME HH MM Enter the transmission start time in either the 12 hour or 24 hour format depending
246. l 3 Set the Option for First Page Image Press MENU O ft SET RELAY END REPORT 1 ALWAYS 2 ON ERROR 3 0FF Select the desired option to send a Relay result report to the Originator terminal when this DP120F DP125F is the hub unit used in a relay transmission This is only applicable if the DP120F DP125F is used as a Hub unit for the relay transmis sion To ALWAYS send a report to the Originator press Q To only send a report when an error has occurred press To turn OFF Automatic sending of report press PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE 1 ON 2 OFF D To send a first page image of the facsimile document press 2 To not send a first page image of the facsimile document press The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COMPLE H iw After completing the Relay Des tination Report Setting you may continue to select other Report settings referring to their associ ated pages for instruction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Reception List Settings 1 Display the RECEPTION LIST Menu 2 Select the Job for Reception List 3 LOCAL MAILBOX LIST 4 REMOTE MAILBOX LIST D RELAY RECEPTION LIST Press MENU GGG 02 R 03 RI 01 LOCAL MAILBO
247. ll connect you to an outside line In such cases REDIAL press ___ to enter a 3 sec PAUSE ond pause This pause may be repeated if necessary and may be entered anywhere between digits A pause en try is indicated as a hyphen on the LCD display The telephone number is dis played on the bottom row of the LCD display as you enter it Confirm that the number is cor rect ABB NBR 001 TEL NUMBER MAX128 9583359 ff ENTER lt Then press ABB NBR 001 2nd TEL NBR MAX128 Alternate Numbers are optional If the remote location does not have two or more facsimile units in the same area you can leave this entry blank See page 70 for more information Enter the Alternate Facsimile Number Then press ENTER i COMM 1 YES OPTION Abbreviated Dialer Registration continued 9 Select Communication Options Advanced Setup This setting will allow you to specify one or more of the fol lowing Communication Options for the Abbreviated Dial Number you are registering Delayed Communication Default off Select to program a trans mission start time Transmission Report Default off Enables or disables the printing of a TX Report Line Monitor Default off Enables or disables the line monitor speaker during dial ing Quality TX Default off Selects a lower modem speed for poor communica tion links Sub Addre
248. llation continued 5 Install the 6 Close the Paper Recording Paper Tray Place the recording paper stack Push the paper tray all the way into the tray into the machine NOTE NOTES As the tray is closed listen e Do not exceed the upper for the sound of the paper stack limit line as this may pressure plate moving up cause paper mis feeds into position e Make sure that the paper is seated under the two separation claws on the right side of tray e Be careful not to damage the claws of the paper tray Recording Paper Size Adjustment About Paper Sizes e Your TOSHIBA facsimile has been preset to accept letter size recording paper In the event that you receive a legal size 8 5 x14 recep tion it will automatically be reduced to fit onto letter size 8 5 x11 paper e If you receive only Legal size receptions and do not wish them to be automati cally reduced Adjust the re cording paper tray to load the legal size paper e If you receive a mixture of Letter and Legal size re ceptions and you do not wish your legal receptions to be automatically re duced Add an optional re cording paper tray to support both the letter and legal size paper With the second re cording paper tray your TOSHIBA facsimile will auto matically select the appropri ate paper size to match the pages you receive 1 Pull Out the Paper Tray 2 Adjust the Paper Guide 3 At
249. lling at the time set in this procedure Turnaround Polling Turnaround Polling allows you to poll another facsimile after transmitting documents to it on the same phone call NOTE Turnaround polling may not operate with certain non TOSHIBA models Load the Document 2 Display the TURNAROUND POLL Menu 3 Select ON 4 Select the Security Code Option Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 MEMORY 100 UMBER RESIDUAL TER TEL Press MENU CY Q TURNAROUND POLL 1 ON 2 OFF To set Turnaround Poll to ON press TURNAROUND POLL SECURITY CODE 1 YES 2 NO Select the security code option TURNAROUND POLL SECURITY CODE 2 NO If the remote facsimile is a TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4 digit security code is assigned to the document to be polled select 1 YES by pressing Q If the remote facsimile is not a TOSHIBA facsimile or no secu rity Codes are in use select 2 NO by pressing Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5 Turnaround Polling continued D Enter the Security Code 6 Dial the Number of Remote Facsimile d Complete the Procedure Enter the 4 digit security code for the document to be re trieved TURNAROUND P
250. lso useful when tracking communication activities using the transmission and reception journals see page 205 e RESIDUAL MEMORY The amount of memory remaining for memory transmission usage is called Residual Memory and is displayed as a percentage value File Number and Residual Memory Display Example SCANNING INTO MEMORY File No FILE NBR 123 RESIDUAL MEMORY 70 Residual Memory NOTES 1 If there is not enough Residual Memory or the Job queue it at full capacity a Memory Full status may occur If this occurs during scanning a document for transmission the facsimile dis plays MEMORY OVERFLOW MAY 17 00 WED11 49 MEMORY OVERFLOW STOP 2 If this message is displayed press to cancel the Memory Transmission The Memory Overflow message will be reset and the document will be ejected 3 Wait until memory becomes available i e after some reserved jobs are com pleted and retry the job later or use a Direct Document Transmission see page 103 4 A maximum of 100 transmissions can be reserved for Memory Transmissions including Polling Reception reservations and mailboxes Any transmission at tempted thereafter will result in a direct transmission from the ADF Memory Transmission continued Memory Transmission Procedure 1 Load the Document 2 Dial the Facsimile Number 3 Start Scanning 4 Return to the Standby Mode Load the document face
251. lural TOSHIBA Faxes are con nected to your PC you can operate the device setups for each device Every time you operate the device setup a new TOSHIBA Viewer utility is created 1 Unimessage Pro device wizard appears 2 Select the device driver installation type leet E ierg BE Semen den dete Ber Ces seis Fe pre ru Can mi keep Fra Rees Qipti Zb EEN Lass fod Sime DI Se me e h aati panmi rent ken ri Webra We Cave Enter the details for each entry field NOTE At least Name Organization Address Country Telephone number and Fax number must be entered The Address entry must be more than 20 letters After all required entries are completed click Next ee a i eg BS Cop hee ie eee cei tn ore ee eo ia D Ye boot ka deere eer deed ia tine capai gd mmal te appa chew bire ta ret alkoi ni eae eae battere E tepi pori 2 deer coed in P reegen bars qii dean eros Re NL Cael Select Yes select a device connected to this computer from a list of supported devices and click Next Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer continued Device Setup continued 3 Select the manufacturer of your fax and the device model 4 Enter System Device Name and Descriptive Device Name DN Select Custom for the type of Setup Ur nsrioebs E dirias aiiai Teri ig ed ces aed eee oe poe le een hi p
252. ly all power off to minimize pow er consumption Select one of three modes Automatic Manual or OFF Printer Power Saver turns only the fuser section off during the time period selected NOTE When the machine is in the Super Power Saver mode it will exit from the Super Power Saver mode when any of the following occurs The machine receives a facsimile Option handset or exter nal telephone handset is lifted Document is loaded into the document tray is pressed or PC has accessed the ma chine 1 Display the POWER 2 Select the Power 3 Select the Super 4 Enter the Start Time SAVER Menu Saver Mode Power Saver Option Period Press Select the desired Power Saver Select the desired Super Power Enter the time period in min MENU Mode Saver Option utes for standby operation prior GGG 01 SUPER P S 02 PRINTER P S DL to select Super Power Saver mode Go to Step 3 SUPER POWER SAVER 1 AUTOMATIC 2 MANUAL 3 0FF to select Printer Power es mode Go to Step 5 PRINTER POWER SAVER 1 0N 2 OFF 2 to select Automatic mode Go to Step 4 START TIME TIME 01 60 MIN 3 to select Manual mode In manual mode you can acti vate Super Power Saver using a key on the Control Panel to select OFF OPERATION COMPLE el
253. ment reservation during setup This password is used only when reserving documents from a remote facsimile or the local hub and not used during document retrieval To setup an Open Mailbox see page 149 To delete an Open Mailbox see page 151 To reserve a document to a remote hub see page 153 To reserve a document to a local DP120F DP125F see page 155 To retrieve Poll a document from a remote hub see page 157 To retrieve Print a document from a local DP120F DP125F see page 159 To delete a document from an Open Mailbox see page 161 PEO Ole oN Simple amp Security Polling Reservation This procedure allows the DP120F DP125F to send a doc ument to another remote fac simile when requested In addi tion documents can be protect ed from unauthorized remote facsimiles by using security codes Two types of security codes are offered 4 Digit Security Code When the 4 digit security code is selected as the check code the document can only be re ceived by TOSHIBA facsimiles with the matching security code Facsimile Number If a facsimile number is selected as the check code the remote facsimile s Transmit Terminal Identification TTI is checked prior to document transmission This type of security code can be used with facsimiles made by other manufacturers This TTI must be properly pro grammed into the remote fac simile for this procedure to func tion NOTES e Only one Simple Polling res
254. mile will display the fol lowing screen for approximately 2 seconds before returning to the Standby Mode CANCELLED ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS Department Code Access This procedure assumes that you have selected and config ured the Department Codes on pages 55 and 56 of this manual Once selected the use of the facsimile is limited to authorized personnel only NOTE The usage for each depart ment is recorded on the De partment Control List see page 217 1 DEPT CODE Standby Menu 2 Enter the Department Code 3 Complete the Procedure The Department Code Standby menu is shown below AAY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 80 ENTER DEPT CODE Enter the 5 digit Department Code preset for your depart ment ENTER DEPT CODE EE Then press ENTER NOTE If you do not have a valid Department Code Password you cannot access this fac simile Contact the key operator or supervisor for more informa tion If the password you have en tered is valid the ordinary Standby Mode screen as shown below will be displayed The access will be limited to one transmission job or one Op eration Panel function printing a list accessing a Mailbox etc If the password does not match verify your password and re en ter MAY 17 00 WED10 22 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 LOAD DOCUME
255. mode and return to the Standby Mode Dial Type Setting There are two types of dialing modes DP Dial Pulse Rotary and MF Multifrequency touch tone If your telephone emits tones when you are dialing this usually indicates that you have a MF type line and no adjust ment is required Otherwise you will have to select the appropri ate setting To display the SETUP menu press MENU 1 LANGUAGE 2 DATE amp TIME 3 TERMINAL ID 4 DIAL TYPE NOTE Only 4 selections can be displayed at one time 1 Display the DIAL TYPE Menu 2 Select Your Dial Type 3 Enter the Access Digits 4 Select Another SETUP Item or Highlight using Ly or 4 and press ENTER p DIAL TYPE 2 DP Select your dial line type Q for Multi Frequency type default for Dial Pulse type If the Line 2 board has been in stalled repeat Step 2 for the 2nd line DIAL TYPE LINE 2 2 DP After selecting the dial type the following will be displayed DELETE ACCESS DIGIT ACCESS DIGIT MAX10 Access digits are numbers which are required by PBX sys tems to access the phone sys tem outside the PBX A com mon access digit is 9 Access Digits are PBX digits such as 9 pause and 1 which need to be omitted when using chain dialing If you do not requi
256. n will vary depending upon the actual job types currently in use If a job type is not currently active it will not appear on the LCD screen Items 4 to 5 are outside the LCD frame Use the SE or LY to display and highlight the desired item Cancelling a Job Reservation continued 2 Select the Job Type 3 Cancel a Reception 4 Enter JOB NUMBER DN Cancel Other Jobs 6 Press the ENTER to Cancel the Job Select the desired job type The operation and screen to fol low varies for each item number selected If you selected 2 RECEIVE go to Step 3 If you selected 5 JJOB NUM BER go to Step 4 If you selected 1 TRANSMIT 3 POLLING 4 POLLING RESERVE Go to Step 5 To cancel a reception use the following keys to select the tele phone line to stop the reception BRE Go to Step 6 NOTE If Line 2 is also in use for receiving the Line 2 status is also displayed by pressing The two screens are alter nated by pressing SE or cvs LINE 1 RECEIVE 81 425 86 7449 ey Enter the job number you want to cancel lt Git GHI TUV WXYZ OQO OG JOB NUMBER XXX Go to Step 6 JOB CANCEL ENTER CANCEL T PREVIOUS SCREEN J NEXT SCREEN Display the status of the desired job by using 4 and or iv Go to Step 6
257. n Report Geng 198 Multi Address Transmission Report Setting cccceeseceesseeeeeeteeeees 199 Multi Polling Report Setting eccececseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 200 Relay Originator Report Zetting 201 Relay Station Transmission Report Setting cccccsseeeeeeeeeesteeeeees 202 Relay Destination Report Zetting 203 Reception List Settings ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeseeneeeeseaaeeeseas 204 LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND PRINTING PROCEDURE ccccsssessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 205 Transmission Reception Journal Communication Journal 205 Transmission Report asosidir eect cess eeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeete 207 Memory Transmission Report cecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeaas 208 Reservation Listessa nonea bee ENNEN ceive le ca ee cave ees 209 Multi Address Transmission Report 210 Multi Polling REPOT AA 211 Relay Transmission Originator Report cccccceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaes 212 Relay Transmission Relay Station Report c csssecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 213 Relay Transmission End Terminal Report cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 214 Relay Reception List eccccceeseeccceeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeneeneenes 215 Mailbox Relay Box ITU T Compatible F code Communication List 216 Department Control List 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeeee
258. n the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press POLLING POLLING 2 POLLING RESERVE 3 PROG CONT POLL Select 38 PROG CONT POLL by pressing PROG CONT POLL INTERVAL 10 70 MIN Ho Enter the time interval between polling sequences 10 to 70 minutes Only interval settings of 10 minute increments are permis sible Example Enter 1 for 10 minutes or 2 for 20 min utes etc Then press ENTER PROG CONT POLL TIME PERIOD s 00 17 00 Enter the polling start and stop time When the time period is dis played correctly press ENTER L NOTES e You may use OLO to move the cursor left and right e If the 12 hour format is selected you may use the Ta Ly keys to select AM or PM PROG CONT POLL Tl FOR SETTING SCHEDULE MON FRI Continuous Polling continued DN Select the Day of the Week 6 Enter the Number of Remote Facsimile 7 Select the Security Code Option 8 Enter the Security Code Select the day of the week to start polling When the day of week range is displayed cor rectly press ENTER NOTES e To designate the start or end day use to move the entry point e Press AJiLZay to change the day PROG CONT POLL ENTER TEL NUMBER ABB NUMBER OR ONE
259. nds e SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR XXX RESIDUAL MEMORY 70 When document scan ning is completed Standby Mode screen Or display the Group Dial Di rectory by pressing SPEED DIAL ABB DIRECTORY GROUP COMM RESERVATION GROUP NBR 1 1999 Go to Step 3 Enter the Multi address Trans mission Group Number 1 to 1999 EXAMPLE To enter the Group Number 0001 press Q Leading zeros if any may be omitted NOTE When an incorrect number is entered use to de lete the preceding digits or STOP press once to start over from the beginning COMM RESERVATION GROUP NBR 1 1999 iff When the correct Group Num ber is displayed press START D COMM RESERVATION GROUP NBR COLORADO GRP gu 2 seconds 0001 SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR XXX RESIDUAL MEMORY 70 S When document scan ning is completed Standby Mode screen Multi Key Quick Broadcast Transmission The Multi Key Quick Broadcast Transmission allows documents to be sent to a combination of the following numbers without pre programming a group e Abbreviated Dial Numbers e One Touch Dial Keys e Alphabet Dialed Numbers e Keypad Dialed Numbers 1 Load the Document 2 Press the MULTI Key 3 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document fa
260. nel to the 50 Select the desired type of Mail Select 5 CANCEL MAILBOX Enter the Box Number max 20 73 view to select the desired box by pressing digits Function Key To cancel documents from a GE QEF Press Confidential Box press O 2 G ITU GHI JKL MNO OJOO a NOTE SE e You may use a 7 LYA OKOLO to scroll up down the menu MAILBOX CONFIDENTIAL screen to select this option 2 BULLETIN BOARD 2 TX TO MAILBOX Then press 3 RELAY 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX CANCEL CONFIDENTIAL ENTER lt 2 A DON SETUP A INPUT TO MAILBOX Co 5 CANCEL MAILBOX To cancel a document from a Bulletin Board Box press BULLETIN BOARD 1 PRINT MAILBOX 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX 4 INPUT TO MAILBOX 5 CANCEL MAILBOX BOX NUMBER MAX20 or CANCEL BULLETIN BD BOX NUMBER MAX20 If you are cancelling from a Box with a password assigned go to Step 5 If you are cancelling from a Box with no password assigned go to Step 6 Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox Local Hub continued 5 Enter the Password 6 Complete the Procedure Enter the password to access Confidential Box GHI JKL MNO PQRS Tuv WXYZ CANCEL CONFIDENTIAL PASSWORD MAX20 EEN O or a N CANCEL BULLETIN BD PASSWORD MAX20 EEE Se Then press ENTER 3 The facsi
261. ng any of the following dialing meth ods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 POLL CONFIDENTIAL TEL NUMBER 1230 XQ MAX128 or POLL BULLETIN BOARD TEL NUMBER 1230 po MAX128 The facsimile starts dialing the remote hub unit to retrieve the document The following screen is displayed for about 2 seconds before returning to the Standby Mode OPERATION COMPLETED FILE NBR 234 Printing a Document from a Mailbox Local Hub This section describes the pro cedure to retrieve a document from a local DP120F DP125F s Confidential Box or Bulletin Board Box For more informa tion see page 149 1 Display the MAILBOX Menu 2 Select the Open Mailbox Type 3 Select PRINT MAILBOX 4 Enter the Box Number Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press ITU MAILBOX MAILBOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP Select the desired type of Mail box To print a document from a Confidential Box press Q CONFIDENTIAL 1 PRINT MAILBOX 2 TX TO MAILBOX 3 POLL FROM MAILBOX To print a document from a Bul letin Board Box press BULLETIN BOARD 1 PRINT MAILBOX
262. nger print documents Receptions will be stored in memory until the Toner has been replaced It is recommended to replace the Toner Cartridge whenever the TONER LOW message is displayed using the following procedure 1 Open the Top Cover 2 Remove the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit 3 Separate the Drum Unit 4 Remove the Toner Cartridge Top Cover Release Lever Developer Toner Cartridge Grasp the Top Cover Release Lever and open the Top Cover Remove the Developer Assem bly with the Drum Unit attached IMPORTANT e Never touch the photo conductive drum the green surface of the Drum Unit If the surface is scarred or scratched it will cause print quality problems e Do not expose the photo conductive drum of the Drum Unit to light for more than 3 minutes If the Drum Unit is to be left anywhere outside the facsimile be certain to cover it with cloth paper etc Separate the Drum Unit from the Developer Assembly NOTE Avoid touching the toner to your clothing since toner can not be removed easily If the toner sticks to your clothing immediately rinse out the toner with cold water Press the green Button on the left of the Developer Assembly and slide the toner cartridge to the left to disengage it from the Developer Assembly Lift the Toner Cartridge from the Developer Assembly Dispose of the used toner cartridge p
263. nnected to a PBX system you may need to enter an access digit 9 and pause so the system will connect you to an out side line In such cases REDIAL press ___ to enter a 3 sec PAUSE ond pause This pause may be repeated if necessary and may be entered anywhere between digits A pause en try is indicated as a hyphen on the LCD display Check the entered telephone number on the bottom row of the LCD display If it is correct press ENTER lt ONE TOUCH 03 2nd TEL NBR MAX128 Alternate Numbers are optional If the remote location does not have two or more facsimiles in the same area you can leave this entry blank See page 77 for more information Enter the Alternate Facsimile Number Then press ENTER lt COMM OPTION 1 YES 2 NO This setting will allow you to specify one or more of the fol lowing Communication Options for the One Touch key you are registering Delayed Communication Default off Select to program a trans mission start time Transmission Report Default off Enables or disables the printing of a TX Report Line Monitor Default off Enables or disables the line monitor speaker during dial ing Quality TX Default off Selects a lower modem speed for poor communica tion links Sub Address Default none Specifies a Sub Address for the One Touch key being registered The remote unit must support Sub Address capabil
264. nt Tray Place documents face down on this tray to transmit or copy Recording Paper Exit Tray Stacks recording paper after printing See page 19 Centronics PC Interface This interface is used for connection to personal computers for Scanning Printing and programming various settings from a PC Operation Panel Used to perform programming and operation of the facsimile machine See page 13 Top Cover Release Lever Provides access to printer section to replace supplies or to clear paper jams See page 233 Paper Tray Holds up to 550 sheets of recording paper See page 22 Bypass Tray Cover Remove this cover when you Right Side Cover install the Bypass Tray Provides access to the recording paper feed path 002 Rear View External Telephone Connector Connection for an External Line 1 Connector Telephone set See page 18 Connection for the telephone line cord from wall or PSTN system See page 18 Handset Connector Connection for the optional Handset unit See page 18 Centronics PC Interface Line 2 Connector Connection for the 2nd telephone line cord from wall or PSTN system DP125F Standard DP120F Option AC Inlet Power Switch 003 When Optional Recording Paper Trays are Installed With two recording pape
265. ntry 21 JOB CANCEL Key Used to cancel a job reserved or being executed see page 119 22 E MAIL ADDRESS Key Used to program E mail addresses when programming One Touch Key or Abbrevi ated Numbers By pressing this key prior to a transmission an E mail address can be entered for an Internet FAX transmission 23 JOB STATUS Key Displays the communication status of reserved transmissions see page 119 24 One Touch Keys 1 49 One Touch Keys 50 73 Function Keys and Keyboard View the One Touch Keys 1 49 One Touch Keys 50 73 Function Keys and Keyboard by turning the Flip Panels see page 15 Function Keys The Function Keys are located on the left of the Op eration Panel and enable the following frequently used functions and settings by pressing the desired key CHAIN DIAL COMM Used to dial a remote party using Chain Dialing see page 166 CHARGE CODE Allows entry of a Charge Code at the time of dialing or during Abbreviated Dial and One Touch Dial pro gramming see page 171 DELAYED COMM Schedules a delayed communication job to be per formed at a designated time see page 181 DIRECT TX Allows transmission direct from the document feeder without the use of memory see page 105 LOW SPEED TX Used to select a lower transmission speed to trans mit a document when poor line conditions are ex pected such as when transmitting to a foreign coun try that can only accept low speed data see page 184
266. o the human body If any toner sticks to your clothes wash away the toner immediately using cold water Attach the Drum Unit to the De veloper Assembly Position the Drum Unit with the green drum surface facing the black toner roller on the Developer Assem bly Holding the Developer Assem bly by the green handles align the three shafts on the Devel oper Assembly sides with the slots in the machine frame Toner Cartridge Replacement continued 10 Press Down on the Drum Unit Drum Unit Press firmly down on the green squares on the Drum Unit until the Drum Unit clicks into place Replacing the Fuser Cleaner To maintain optimum print quali ty replace the Fuser Cleaner each time you replace the Toner Cartridge CAUTION The fuser s interior can be very hot Be careful when re placing the fuser cleaner Do not touch any surfaces inside the printer except as indicated 11 Remove the fuser Cleaner 12 Install the New fuser Cleaner 13 Close the Top Cover 061 Fuser Cleaner Fuser Cleaner A i EN S SE 045 Grasp the two green tabs the used fuser cleaner from the ma chine Remove the new Fuser Cleaner from its plastic bag and install it positioning its white pad side down Holding the Top Cover Release Lever close the Top Cover then release the Lever Drum Unit Replacement Repl
267. ogrammed see NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 page 197 Printing will automatically start after a transmission is DURATION PGS TO DEPT NBR ACOUNT MODE STATUS completed NBR FILE NBR DATE TIME 001 020 MAY 17 14 01 00 58 002 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST G3 512 NG 20 The print format is the same as that for the Transmission Journal on the preceding page except that the record of the only last transmission job is issued in a Transmission Report 207 Memory Transmission Report MEMORY TRANSMISSION REPORT FILE NUMBER DATE TO DOCUMENT PAGES START TIME END TIME SENT PAGES STATUS PAGE TIME TEL NUMBER1 TEL NUMBER2 NAME O01 MAY 17 00 14 25 12345678901234567890 12345678901234567890 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ12345678901234 070 MAY 17 14 18 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST 02 MAY 17 14 20 MAY 17 14 23 02 OK File Number of the transmission job Date and time when the job is accepted Remote Party s Name or Facsimile Tele phone Number Number of pages input to memory Time when the transmission started Time when the transmission ended the time when a Recovery Transmission is designated Number of pages transmitted normally Transmission result This is the result report printed after a Memory Transmission A job transmitted after the document is first scanned into memory Print
268. oles e Transparent pages or pages with a smooth shiny finish e Cloth or metal sheets When using originals with the following specifications use a carrier sheet to avoid document jams or misfeeds When using carrier sheets only one sheet can be sent at a time e Smaller than minimum size e With thickness less than 0 05 mm To use a carrier sheet lift the clear cover place a single document sheet face up on the paper sheet Purchase carrier sheets from your TOSHIBA facsimile dealer or use a transparency with a paper backing attached at the lead edge EP Se Document Loading 1 Remove Attached Items 2 Place Document Pages on the Document Tray 3 Adjust the Settings a Ls 073 About 45 Document Face Side 074 Remove any staples paper clips or other items from your document before feeding it into the facsimile When scanning Legal size doc uments extend the Exit Docu ment Tray Extension Up to 50 sheets Letter size can be loaded and sent at a time Stagger the leading edges of the sheets slightly and insert them into the document feeder Adjust the Document Guides to fit the width of the document Load the document face down on the document tray The first page of your document should be at the bottom of the Docu ment Tray Gently insert the leading edge of the paper into the facsimile as shown The facsimile waits 2 seconds
269. on Optional Handset Dialing eeeeeeees 107 On hook Transmission Monitor Speaker Dialing 0cccceeeeeees 106 TE Ui e EE 110 Report Setting acii aiaa eatin tected danielle 197 Temporary Direct Document Transmission cece 105 Documents Acceptable Document Gizes 87 Document Exit Tray scrasa ii ai T AN 19 Document Length Setting cceecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeessaaeeesaes 60 Loading EE 88 Drum Unit Replacement AA 31 E ECM Error Correction Mode Default ECM Setting ccceeceececceeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeecaaeeseeeeeeseaeeesenaeeesenes 63 Disabling ECM Temporarily ccccceescceeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeessaaeeeeaes 172 Error Codes Printed On Heport 229 Error MOSSAQES aa iotr scene aa anes ET ANE abet Cendsantet Genesee 226 F File Number and Residual Memory ccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaaes 101 FROME VIEW eraan ea E A EE Goa hed A tade ts abet a 10 Function CEET 15 Discard see Reception Settings Siller e BEE 223 Fuser Cleaner Installation EE 27 Replacement esoe eege AER 30 G Group Group Broadcast Transmission eseesseeeeeseseneseerteieesrinesrinsssennees 123 Group NUMBSLLISE EE 221 Group Number Registration ccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesnaeeeeeeees 83 Multi Key Quick Broadcast Transmission cccccseescceeeseesteeeeees 124 Relay TranSmiSSion s kanini eenn iren rE ERRAR EEK REEE 126 H Hardware Options
270. on the ma chine set up example 23 30 in the 24 hour format DELAYED COMM TIME HH MM 23 3 Press ENTER DELAYED COMM TIME 23 30 Displayed for 2 seconds The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option To request a Transmission Re port automatically after sending document using this One Touch key select SET TX REPORT 1 ON To enable a TX Report press To disable a TX Report press The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option To enable disable the facsimi le s Line Monitor Speaker when dialing with this One Touch key press LINE MONITOR 1 0 To enable the monitor speaker press To disable the monitor speaker press The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option To transmit documents to this One Touch Dial Number at a lower speed for poor line condi tions press To cancel the QUALITY TX op tion press To select 14400BPS press To select 9600BPS press To select 4800BPS press QUALITY TX 1 OFF 2 14400BPS 3 9600BPS m4 4800BPS This item is outside the LCD frame To view it use the w scroll key The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 Select the next Option One Touch Dialer Registration continued 9 Select Communication O
271. onfiguration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Line Monitor This function is used to set the speaker ON in order to monitor the dialing and connection por tion of every transmission This function is mainly used to confirm dialing and phone line status When two phone lines are si multaneously used for sending the job initiated last will be monitored 1 Display the LINE MONITOR Menu 2 Select the Line Monitor Option Select Another SETUP Item or Press GGG LINE MONITOR 1 ALWAYS 2 OFF To turn ON the monitor speaker press To turn OFF the monitor speaker press OPERATION COMPLETED Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Receive Interval Setting This function insures there will be a period of time set aside to receive incoming facsimiles dur ing periods of heavy outgoing transmission activity After ev ery fourth consecutive transmis sion this machine will wait 0 to 15 minutes to allow incoming facsimiles to be received de fault is 3 minutes 1 Display the RECEIVE INTERVAL Menu 2 Enter the Receive Interval 3 Sele
272. onfigure the device Click Next jomman Pre akevien sere Cece one peed ede Dope rege Dp bigi DEI peg eee p pis be fe kg Cae tte can ine hi kl meas de Ty Bact Med Cave If the DP120F DP125F prints using a TOSHIBA Viewer driver TOSHIBA Viewer will ask if a printer driver for the DP120F DP125F should be created or not If you choose to create this printer it will be named after the DP120F DP125F but you can edit this name if you prefer Click Next NOTE If you choose not to create the print printer driver during the definition of the device or it is deleted you can create the print printer driver for the DP120F DP125F later To do this open the Devices folder right click on the appropriate device and select Cre ate printer For further details see the Help for Create printer Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer continued Device Setup continued Q Select whether to creat a shortcut and the location 10 Complete the device setup 14 TOSHIBA Viewer starts jp Hiii Eug iiie aiiai SS Da pp a a a ia Fe Leo aa RW Lr a a iacha ba ha haci i pme A bab pe oder Be ge ee ba De Ir ja P pissaa C ppe gas Click Next NOTE If you want to install several TOSHIBA Viewers it is required to change the name of the shortcut to avoid the name being overlapped a riis Aiai leen eau ckt fe brah Laikan g piip ell be akd ka Ba fe biai
273. or O screen and the unit returns to D the individual test selection screen Level 0 produces no sound and Level 7 the maximum volume if eyen one of them is not out Te festlt ob tie Speaker ies i Speaker sound is output at the put normally press can be confirmed with the self volume level selected Check i test report To print the self 2 that all the volumes are output test report refer to PRINTING normally After checking press 2 A TEST RESULT on page 4 252 ENTER If the result of the speaker test is judged to be NG call your D SPEAKER TEST service representative ENTER TEST RESULT 1 0K E SPEAKER TEST RT STOP TO COMPLETED VOLUME 3 247 SWITCH TEST The switch test checks if the detection switches operate nor mally The test items in SWITCH TEST mode are as follows e Detection of Scanner Cover open closed status e Detection of Top Cover open closed status e Detection of Process Unit Drum Unit with Developer Assem bly presence absence status e Detection of Recording Paper and Recording Paper Tray pres ence absence status e Detection of Bypass Tray presence absence status e Detection of Flip Panels on the Operation Panel NOTE If no operation is performed within 10 seconds after an opera tional instruction is displayed on the screen during the switch test the test result will be judged to be NG 1 Select the SWITCH 2
274. ouch key Example One Touch key 35 35 D GROUP NBR 0001 ONE TOUCH KEY 35 COLORADO GRP REGISTERED or 2 seconds ENTER GROUP OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE UMBER e Returns to Step 3 Press to display the pre ceding level screen in Menu Screen mode Or STOP press to complete the Group Setting operation and re turn to the Standby Mode Group Number Registration continued Q Assign a One Touch Key continued To skip assigning this group to a One Touch key press ENTER a C ENTER GROUP NUMBER OR PRESS BACK TO PREVIOUS STOP TO COMPLETE Return to Step 3 Press to display the pre ceding level screen in Menu Screen mode STOP Press e to complete the Group Setting operation and re turn to the Standby Mode If the selected One Touch key is already linked to or registered with any data the following is displayed e D ONE TOUCH 01 ALREADY ASSIGNED ABB NBR 003 SMITH S OFFICE yee 2 seconds e D ONE TOUCH 01 CANCEL 1 CANCEL 2 RETAIN J To select 1 CANCEL to can cel the existing link or preset data of this One Touch key press ROUP NBR 0001 ESS ONE TOUCH KEY ENTER OR TER TO SKIP
275. ouch key 01 01 L The One Touch key number and the name of the party appear on the LCD display for about 2 sec onds Your facsimile will automatically start scanning the document into memory if enabled While scanning the facsimile dials connects and starts transmis sion COMM RESERVATION ONE TOUCH 01 L A OFFICE Displayed for 2 seconds SCANNING TO MEMORY FILE NBR 089 RESIDUAL MEMORY 99 During scan to memory MAY 17 00 WED11 49 RE SIDUAL MEMORY 99 During transmission NOTES If a One Touch key is not programmed the mes sage NUMBER NOT LISTED is displayed for 2 seconds an alarm buzzer sounds and the display returns to the pre vious status screen CO ON NU M RESERVATION E TOUCH 01 BER NOT LISTED When an incorrect One Touch key has been se STOP lected press im mediately to cancel the transmission Abbreviated Dialing Once an Abbreviated Dial Num ber is programmed with a valid remote facsimile location that location can be accessed by re calling the corresponding Abbre viated Dial Number The document must be loaded and the resolution and contrast set before a transmission using Abbreviated Dialing see page 89 1 Press the SPEED 2 Enter the 3 Press the START Key Tray DIAL Key Abbreviated Number Press Enter the
276. p sl assl Restart your computer to complete the uninstallation Some files are deleted after restarting the computer DESCRIPTION OF THE FUNCTIONS Descriptions and instruc tions for general func tions are described in this section For details and instructions other than those described in this manual please refer to the TOSHIBA Viewer on line Help Description of the Main Welcome Menu u BE E a Welcome to Unimessage Pro ve CRAFT D e TOSHIBA Viewer EE Se d Powered by uimimessage TOSHIBA From this menu you can access the main TOSHIBA Viewer system You can examine the lists of scanned and filed images by clicking the TOSHIBA Viewer logo The round buttons provide quick access to some of the TOSHIBA Viewer functions and can include a combination of the following Browse Folders This takes you to the list of folders within TOSHIBA Viewer so that you can check on the progress of messages examine the lists of received transmitted filed messages and print these lists or individual messages Copy This combines the functions of TWAIN scanning and printing and allows you to make multiple hardcopies of a document in the automatic document feeder of the TWAIN scanner File Scan This takes you to the TWAIN scanner driver or for DP120F DP125F the TOSHIBA Viewer Scan setup dialog so that you can scan documents or images into your PC Email Scan This scans a document or image using any TWAIN
277. p topic 1 Select Setup Routing Rules from the menu 3 Enter the name of the rule FISCHER Click New to create a new rule Routing Rules Wizard appears Click Finish 2 Check on the terms for a rule 4 Click Move up to change the apply order Click Next Follow the prompts to create a rule Click OK For further details of creating and modifying the Routing Rules refer to Help Browse Folders continued Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders Once files are stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders you can ask TOSHIBA Viewer to find items for you based on their properties NOTE e You can also search folders by selecting the Search history e In order to search in the specific folder right click on the specific folder and select Find _ Click Find icon 2 Define a new search ae 2 tt Find Find icon Check on Include subfolders when you want to search folders in subfolders as well Click OK Searching starts For further details of searching click Help on the Search dialog to view a related help topic Browse Folders continued Creating Folder TOSHIBA Viewer uses folders to store messages that you have scanned and details about files you have on your computer You can then search all or some of these folders to find messages or files at a later date You can create your own fold ers and
278. pany logo etc press 2 for YES To omit an image on the cover sheet press for NO FACSIMILE MESSAGE MAY 15 00 TO ABC CORP Mr XXX FAX NUMBER 6688 FROM DEF FAX NUMBER TOTAL PAGE 023 WITHOUT THIS PAGE Image Area Load the image document to be included on the cover sheet NOTE In preparing a document for your cover sheet image only a limited area of the sheet will be included as shown below Any data out of the specified range will be disre garded 8 5 in 216 mm Effective 5 Feed Direction When the document is pulled into the appropriate position the following screen is displayed COVER SHEET PRESS START Press START za When scanning is complete the facsimile returns to the Standby Mode HS Chain Dialing This allows you to dial tele phone facsimile numbers that may require many digits with pauses for voice prompts or variations in number sequences such as long distance access codes or specialized access lines You can combine sets of numbers Abbreviated Dialing Alphabet Dialing One Touch Di aling and Keypad Dialing and pauses in a Chained dial se quence by using the Chain Dial Key If your operation requires paus ing for voice prompts you will need to insert pause signals be tween dial strings To determine the correct amount of time for your pauses you should perform
279. printed or cancelled from the Mailbox 1 Display the MAILBOX 2 Select BOX SETUP 3 Select BOX 4 Enter the Box Menu DELETE Number Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 Select 4 BOX SETUP by Select 3 BOX DELETE by Enter the Box number max 20 73 view to select the desired pressing pressing digits of the Mailbox you want Function Key to delete Press 4 3 ABC DEF y KEE MAILBOX GHI JKL MNO CLOTS MAILBOX SETUP MAILBOX ENTER DELETE BOX NBR oi 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP 1 COMPLETE 2 BOX SETUP 3 BOX DELETE BOX NUMBER MAX20 Then press ENTER lt L If the entered Box number does not have a password pro grammed go to Step 6 If the entered Box number has a password programmed the screen below is displayed Go to Step 5 ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD MAX20 Deleting a Mailbox continued DN Enter the Password 6 Complete the Procedure Enter the Password max 20 The following screen is dis played to indicate that the can CG Gi G cellation is accepted GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CANCELLED OG ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD MAX20 xxx Then press ENTER NOTE Make sure that the correct password is entered Other wise the machine will inform
280. ptions continued 9g Sub Address Communication continued Sub Address Communications allow a variety of specialized facsimile communications SUB Sub Address Transmission Allows documents to be routed through remote LAN Fax de vices to specific users worksta tions Allows documents to be trans mitted to specific Mailboxes in remote facsimiles SEP Selective Polling Allows documents to be re trieved from specific Mailboxes residing in remote facsimiles PWD Password Allows secure communications to SUB and from SEP compat ible devices IMPORTANT If you designate an incorrect sub address the communica tion will result in an error If you designate an unnecessary sub address the communication will result in an error 9g 1 Select the Sub Address Comm Options 9g 2 Complete the Sub Address Comm Options Setup 99 3 Select a SUB Sub Address Communication 99 4 Selecta SEP Sub Address Communication If the remote party assigned to this One Touch key requires or provides a Sub Address to route or retrieve messages press Returns to Step 8g 1 SUB ADDRESS COMM B 2 SU 3 SEP m 4 PWD L This item is outside the LCD frame To view it use the y scroll key To complete Sub Address entry or skip this option press Q The display returns to the first screen in Step 9 COM OPTIONS 2 DELAYED CO
281. r for Plug and Play installation DriversNT4 Local Printer amp TWAIN Includes the printer driver and TWAIN driver for installing by Add Printer function in Windows NT4 0 that DP120F DP125F is connected in local DriversNT4 Network Printer Includes the printer driver for Windows NT4 0 that is used as a client computer Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer Before installing TOSHIBA Viewer your TOSHIBA DP120F DP125F must be con nected to your PC via a parallel cable suitable for bi directional communica tions NOTE Please make sure that following terms are satisfied e When using Windows NT 4 0 make sure you have Administra tor access rights e Close all applications that are running to avoid any conflicts during installation e The TOSHIBA DP120F DP125F con nected to your PC is powered on Prompts may vary de pending on your PC con figuration The screens show exam ples of Windows 95 NOTE You can install the drivers by Plug and Play function or Add Printers function You have to choose differ ent sources in the CD ROM when you install by those functions Please see on page 261 for the configura tion of the CD ROM and the descriptions for the sources in each folder 1 Insert the CD ROM 3 Select Language Click Start and select Run Contre hetep Language Ei Select the languege fer this installation from the choices below Click O
282. r names for the dialing addresses JOB MEMORY FULL MEMORY OVERFLOW DOCUMENT JAM PAPER JAM XX UPPER PAPER EMPTY MIDDLE PAPER EMPTY The maximum number of manu ally input phone numbers 100 has been reached Split your transmission into two or more jobs There is not enough memory to perform the requested operation STOP Press to cancel the mes sage Do the operation over again with the Direct Document Transmission or do the opera tion again when enough residual memory is regained If the prob lem occurs frequently you re quire additional memory A document jam has occurred Remove the jammed document see page 232 A recording paper jam has oc curred see page 228 Remove the jammed paper see page 233 No paper exists in the upper pa per tray Supply recording paper to the upper paper tray No paper exists in the middle re cording paper tray This error occurs only with two optional paper tray installed Supply recording paper to the middle recording paper tray Error Messages continued Error Message Cause Solution e O Error Message Cause Solution e O LOWER PAPER EMPTY PAPER EMPTY TONER LOW TONER EMPTY DRUM UNIT WARNING REPLACE DRUM UNIT CONFIRM DEV UNIT CHECK LINE 1 O O 0 0 OG O O 0 No paper exists in the lower paper tray This error occurs with an optional paper tray in stalled
283. r the desired number of copies to be printed 01 to 99 ENTER L OPERATION COMPLE Wi D TELEPHONE HANDSET OPERATION Optional If the optional handset is in stalled you can make a tele phone call using your DP120F DP125F just like an ordinary telephone On hook Dialing 1 Press the MONITOR Key 2 Dial the Remote Party 3 Pick Up the Handset 4 Replace the Handset Without loading any document on the Document Tray press MONITOR L The message ON HOOK is displayed and you hear the dial tone through the speaker Enter the telephone number of the remote party using any of the following dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Pick up the handset to talk NOTE If you do not pick up the handset within 1 minute after dialing the line will be auto matically disconnected When you finish talking return the handset to the handset cradle The display returns to the Standby Mode This function is for utilizing vari ous information services via the telephone Even when the dial type of your facsimile is set to DP Dial Pulse type the facsimile can generate a TONE signal to ac cess information services such as facsimile on demand sys tems voice menus etc Once on line
284. r trays installed Handset optional Upper Recording Paper Tray Lower Recording With three recording paper trays installed Handset optional Upper Recording Paper Tray Middle Recording Paper Tray Paper Tray optional optional Bypass Tray Bypass Tray DP125F standard DP125F standard SE Lower Recording eninge DP120F optional Paper Tray DP120F optional optional NOTE Optimal height console stands are available for one or two paper tray configurations These stands maximize operational access LCD view angle and provide rugged roller casters for easy cleaning OPERATION PANEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 oe eee Cy oot O oO O oO oO CO oO O M 2 3 10 01 02 03 04 05 D GHI JKL MNO J SPEED DIAL 4 ii 06 07 08 09 10 D PQRS TUV WXYZ REDIAL KEE DO Ce 12 PAUSE MONITOR OOH S amp S i JOB STATUS MENU TX REPORT 16 17 18 19 20 Qa A C x4 Ee O FINE COPY STOP START 21 22 23 24 D Ly O U FINE F Q D d E MAIL ADDRESS TONE O HALFTONE x i C JOB CANCEL ENTER ac MODE L J 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1 Error Lamps 1 In the event an error occurs in the facsimile the corresponding lamp will be 2 LINE 1 Lamp Blinks when communicating using Line 1
285. re document must be scanned into memory first then printing can occur Copying Procedure 1 Load the Document 2 Press the COPY Key 3 Enter the Number of Copies 4 Select the Paper Tray and Paper Size Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER NOTES e When AUTO is selected as the Paper Tray setting you cannot select AUTO for Reduction setting e When AUTO is selected as the Paper Tray setting the paper is not supplied from the tray specified for Letter Head Paper or Separator Page How ever you can select a tray manually by select ing the Paper Tray Display the COPY menu by pressing COPY 1st Row Enter the number of copies required If no entry is made the number of copies will au tomatically be set to 1 2nd Row Displays the Recording Pa per Tray to supply the paper for the copy function 3rd Row Displays the reduction ratio for copying 4th Collate function see page 94 COPIES 1 99 E PAPER REDUCT COLLATE ON Select the number of copies max 99 To not select the Copy Options go to Step 7 To select the Copy Options go to Step 4 Use the Following keys to move to the second row to select the paper tray KE
286. re the use of a credit card when chain dialing ENTER r i press to skip this step Otherwise enter the number max 10 digits from the Dial Keypad Q JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ When the correct Access Digit is displayed press ENTER lt OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode DEVICE CONFIGURATION Configuration Summary This facsimile has many user adjustable settings Each of these configuration set tings is discussed in detail throughout the remainder of this section Use the following procedures to access one or more of these configuration settings 1 Enter the Configuration Menu 2 Select the Desired Configuration Setting 01 16 MENU Press GE The initial Menu Screen displays 1 COMM OPTIONS 2 LISTS 3 INITIAL SETUP 4 DEFAULT SETTINGS J Press 4 to enter DEFAULT SETTING The Default Setting sub menu displays 1 MACHINE SETTINGS 2 TX SETTINGS 3 RX SETTINGS 4 REPORTS amp LIST J Press SR to enter MACHINE SETTINGS The Machine Set tings sub menu will now dis plays 01 SPEAK
287. reserved with a built in battery for about 10 hours If the power supply is cut off for a long time the received data may be lost SUPPLIES Letter size Recording Paper Legal size Recording Paper Drum Kit DK 15 Toner Kit TK 15 Developer Unit DU 15 HARDWARE OPTIONS 2nd NCU Board with V 34 Modem DP120F only Memory Board 4MB DP120F only Recording Paper Tray Bypass Tray DP120F only Handset PCL Print Kit NIC Kit Internet FAX Kit GD 1030 US GC 1030 FU 15L BC 15 HD 15 GA 1020 GF 1010 GD 1040 TOSHIBA Viewer OPERATOR S MANUAL LICENSE AGREEMENT Wordcraft International Limited Unimessage Pro Software Licence Agreement CONDITIONS OF PURCHASE Software is licensed subject to the limitations on permitted use No refund will be given after the purchaser has installed the software This Licence shall continue for as long as the Product is in use Failure to comply with the terms and conditions detailed below will result in termination of the licence All copies of the software must be destroyed on termination of the licence PERMITTED USES The original purchaser may use the software on a computer system owned or used by the original purchaser for the purpose of any business or profession The original purchaser may store the software on a hard disk system for use only by the permitted number of users and connected only to the permitted number of communication devices as specified in
288. rop erly Toner Cartridge Replacement continued 5 Prepare a New Toner Cartridge 6 Install the New Toner Cartridge d Remove the Strip 8 Attach the Drum Unit to the Developer Assembly 9 Install the Developer Assembly with Drum Unit New Toner Cartridge New Toner Cartridge Ze e Developer Assembly Developer Assembly 041 Developer 042 Assembly Developer Assembly 043 Remove the new Toner Car tridge from its plastic bag and save the bag for the used Toner Cartridge Mix the new toner by shaking the Toner Cartridge back and forth NOTE Only use the specified TOSHIBA Toner Cartridge Align the four hooks on the new Toner Cartridge with the slots on the Developer Assembly Slide the cartridge onto the as sembly Move the cartridge to the right until the button on the left of the Developer Assembly clicks into place Holding the Developer Assem bly with one hand grasp the end of the protective strip under the toner housing Pull the Strip firmly to completely remove it from the cartridge NOTES e Do not stand or turn the Developer Assembly up side down to avoid toner leaking out the cartridge after removing the strip e Toner might stick to the strip Avoid toner sticking to your clothes furniture or other items since the toner cannot be removed easily Toner is not harm ful t
289. rter than the re cording area of the paper the received document is printed at its actual size If the received document is larger than the recording area of the paper it will be vertically reduced to fit on the recording paper installed The reception will be divided onto two sheets if the document needs to be reduced to smaller than 73 of its original size Document Recording Paper _ If you desire to receive large originals without reduction or excessive paper usage set the DISCARD function to ON If the lower part of the original exceeds the recording paper by 13 mm or less the image will be automatically discarded This predetermined dimension is a service function setting Contact your Toshiba dealer for the setup If the RX REDUCTION function is OFF the larger original will be recorded on two or more sheets The top of the sec ond page will repeat about 5mm of the lower part of the first page Reception Reduction Setting This function allows the reduc tion of the received image if the received document is larger than the recording pa per 1 Display the SET RX REDUCTION Menu 2 Select the Desired Option Press MENU GGG RX REDUCTION 1 ON 2 OFF Select the desired option To set RX Reduction to ON press To set RX Reduction to OFF press OPERATION COMPLE e Reception Discard Setting This fun
290. s Insert the power cord plug firmly to the wall outlet then insert the other end of the cord into the receptacle on the machine If it is not firmly connected the unit will not operate normally When unplugging the unit grasp by the plug and not the cord Do not share one outlet with too many electric appliances This may create a fire hazard When the possibility of lightning arises unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Also unplug the phone cord from the facsimile unit This prevents possible dam age from lightning striking power or phone lines Avoid sharing the electrical wall outlet with other equipment that may cause power surges air conditioners large copiers etc Power surges may cause the unit to malfunction Do not step on the power cord and do not place anything on it When a Power Failure Occurs In the event of a power failure neither facsimile nor telephone functions of the unit are available In the event a power failure occurs or the power to the unit has been discon nected functions and unit operation will not be possible Any document data stored in memory will be retained for a period of approximately 10 hours if the internal battery is fully charged This period may be shortened if optional memory has been installed On exceeding that time limit the following items will be erased e Document data stored in memory for Transmission Substitute Memory Recep tions etc e The address and de
291. s Select NORMAL for documents by pressing Q Select DARKER to darken light originals e for documents with light or faint print by press WS Select LIGHTER to lighten dark originals e for documents with dark print by pressing OPERATION COMPLE normal H el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Collate Copy Setting When copying documents the COLLATE function may be selected This function will sort multiple page copies into sets of correct order pages This setting establishes the default for the Collate Copy function Collate Copy may also be set manually at the time the copy opera tion is performed Output Examples of Printed Copies With COLLATE Function ON With COLLATE Function Display the i 1 COLLATE copy 2 Ge the Desired 3 pea poet Menu ption em Or Press Select the desired option After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue MENU To set COLLATE COPY to ON press Q To set COLLATE COPY to OFF press
292. s To turn ECM to ON press To turn ECM to OFF press OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Default Setting for Document Mode Resolution and Contrast This setting will select the de fault setting whenever a docu ment is set in the facsimile for transmission Manual settings if selected for a particular docu ment will take precedence over default settings 1 Display the DOCUMENT MODE Menu 2 Select the Resolution Press MENU CGGGE SET RESOLUTION l STANDARD 2 FINE 3 U FINE Select the desired resolution setting by pressing one of the following keys Select STANDARD mode for sending normal text and graph ics by pressing Q Select FINE mode for sending normal text and graphics with extra clarity by pressing Select U FINE Ultra Fine for sending fine text and graphics with extra clarity by pressing SET CONTRAST 1 NORMAL 2 DARKER 3 LIGHTER 3 Select the Contrast 4 Select Another SETUP Item or Select the default contrast level by pressing one of the following key
293. s ee LCD prompt is displayed XXXXXXXX After 2 seconds RELAY END NUMBER GROUP NUMBER TER MORE OR PRESS START XXXX Go to Step 8 ELAY END NUMBER READY ASSIGNED CANCEL RETAIN R A 1 2 To cancel the existing End Sta tion One Touch Key Abbrevi ated Dial Number or Group Number press 2 To retain the existing End Sta tion One Touch Key Abbrevi ated Dial Number or Group Number press 2 Go to Step 8 When all the desired End Sta tion Entries One Touch Keys Abbreviated Dial Numbers or Group Numbers are completed under the same Relay Box press ENTER TRANSMISSION REPORT ENTER TEL NUMBER SPEED DIAL KEY OR OT ENTER TO COMPLETE Enter the facsimile number you want the relay transmission re port relay transmission End Stations results sent to If you do not desire a relay transmission report press ENTER a The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds to indicate that the Mailbox is reg istered REGISTERED 10a Enter the Number Using the Dial Keypad Enter the facsimile number us ing the Dial Keypad TRANSMISSION REPORT EL NUMBER MAX128 Ek Then press ENTER L The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds to indicate that the Mail
294. s for instruction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Relay Station Transmission Report Setting 1 Display the RELAY STN REPORT Menu 2 Set the Option for Relay Hub Station 3 Set the Option for First Page Image Press MENU f SET RELAY STN REPT 1 ALWAYS 2 ON ERROR 3 0FF Select the option to print a re port when the DP120F DP125F is used as a relay hub station This report is printed by the hub unit after a relay transmission to end terminals To ALWAYS print a report press To only print a report when an error has occurred press To turn OFF automatic printing of reports press Go to Step 12 PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE 1 ON 2 OFF To print a first page image of the document press oC To not print a first page image of the document press The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COMPLE el After completing the Relay Sta tion Transmission Report Set ting you may continue to select other Report settings referring to their associated pages for in struction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Relay Destination Report Setting 1 Display the RELAY DEST REPORT Menu 2 Select the Option for End Termina
295. s key to complete the item selection Dial Keypad 1 to 0 Keys Used to enter desired information or to select options STOP Key Used to exit the Menu Operation and return to the Standby Mode Character Entry When programming and regis tering the Autodialer numbers or names you will need to enter al phanumeric characters This section helps you under stand how to easily enter the characters Keys Used in Character Entry Special Character Table INSERT C Q DELETE ABC DEF INSERT Key Inserts characters before the selected highlighted character DELETE Key Deletes the selected character gt Key Moves the cursor to the right If pressed without entering a character it inserts a space lt Key Moves the cursor to the left Provides the user interface for entering The Character Table lists special characters that can be entered when programming this facsimile The table lists the alpha keys in the left column and the characters that correspond to each key in the right column To enter the special characters entry mode press the ALTER NATE key on the keyboard Pressing the alpha key displays the special characters you can en ter Select your desired character by using the or keys and ENTER lt press A Uppercase special characters can be selected by pressing the alpha key while holding down the SHIFT key after the ALTERNATE key is
296. s option to retain the existing reservation Simple amp Secure Polling Use this procedure to retrieve a document from a remote fac simile If the remote facsimile is a TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4 digit security code is programmed to the document to be polled you must enter the correct 4 digit se curity code in order to retrieve the document 1 Display the POLLING Menu 2 Select POLLING 3 Dial the Remote Facsimile 4 Select the Security Code Option Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press POLLING POLLING 2 POLLING RESERVE 3 PROG CONT POLL Select 1 POLLING by press o POLLING ENTER TEL NUMBER Dial the number of the remote facsimile in which the document you want to retrieve is located using any of the following dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Press ENTER POLLING SECURITY CODE 2 NO Select the security code option If the remote facsimile is a TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4 digit security code is pro grammed to the document to be polled select 1 YES by pressing If the remote facsimile is not a TOSHIBA facsimile or a Secu rity Code is not in use select 2 N
297. selected number of rings You can change the ringer count see page 68 NOTE A ring delay can be selected should you wish to speak to the calling party before re ceiving a facsimile If you do not pick up the handset within the selected delay period the facsimile will automatically answer the call and attempt to receive a document Manual Receiving Mode Manual Reception allows you to use the facsimile as a tele phone talking function first and then start a document reception by pressing START e 1 When the facsimile rings pick up the optional handset and talk with the remote party 2 If you hear the facsimile tone through the handset instead of operator s voice you may manually initiate a facsimile reception by pressing START EZ 3 Replace the handset to the cradle The facsimile will start receiving the document Selecting the Receiving Mode The Automatic Receiving Mode AUTO RECEIVE is normally selected You can change the receiving mode from Automatic to Manual or vice versa Refer to Receive Mode Selec tion on page 68 Recording Paper Size This facsimile can use Letter and Legal size paper The received document is recorded printed within the Effective Recording Area of the paper Paver Sze A Effective Letter mm Recording Area inches Legal mm inches NOTES If the received document is equal to or sho
298. sending facsimile s terminal identification or telephone num ber match those assigned to the Abbreviated Dial Numbers or One Touch Dial Keys on your facsimile NOTES e Privileged Reception is ef fective only on incoming calls received in the Auto matic Reception Mode Privileged Reception is not available for polling or mailbox retrieval requests from the remote facsimiles For this feature to work you must pre program the numbers of the facsimiles in your communication system into your DP120F DP125F s Abbreviated Number or One Touch Dial Key database In addition the remote facsimile must have the correct telephone number programmed as its terminal identification Display the ae 1 PRIVILEGED RX 2 S the Privileged Menu eception Option Press To turn ON Privileged Recep MENU SET PRIVILEGED RX IL ON 2 OFF tion press To turn OFF Privileged Recep tion press OPERATION COMPLE 4 el RTI Remote Terminal ID Print To clearly identify the time date and page count of your facsimile receptions the DP120F DP125F is able to print a Reception Footer RTI on received documents using the DP120F DP125F s internal clock RECEIVED 05 17 2000 10 00 FROM 81425887449 TO TOSHIBA PAGE 001 Transmitting Station ID Number Footer Message l Receiving Station ID Start Time Date Page Number NO
299. signate to print a report for every Go to Step 3 transmission or only when an error has occurred during the transmission In addition you have the option of printing the first page image of the fax document on the report to e Ee To set automatic printing press facilitate identification US Go to Step 4 To setup the Communication Report go to pages 197 to 203 RECEPTION LIST The DP120F DP125F will print a reception list under the following conditions C e Reservation to Local Mailbox When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the DP120F DP125F locally a reception list is pMantalis selected printed Remote Mailbox O1 MANUAL MANUAL OUTPUT When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the DP120F DP125F remotely from another fac 02 AUTO 2 TX JOURNAL simile a reception list is printed at the DP120F DP125F 3 RX JOURNAL e Relay Station Reception When the DP120F DP125F is setup as a relay hub and receives a relay transmission from an originator a reception list is printed If Automatic is selected AUTOMATIC JOURNAL 2 OFF Reception Journal Settings continued 3 MANUAL OUTPUT Options 4 AUTOMATIC JOURNAL Options Select the desired option To print both TX and RX Jour JOURNAL a oC To print only a TX Journal nal when is used press JOURNAL when CIS used press To print a RX Journal when JOURNAL is used press
300. signated time of each Timer Transmission Timer Polling Reception etc Programmed data such as the clock Auto Dial Numbers and user configurations will not be erased This data is supported by second battery with a maximum five year life from time of manufacture In the event that document data has been erased due to a power failure the message POWER FAILURE is displayed on the LCD as shown to the right and a Power Failure Report is issued once the power is restored see page 225 MAY 17 00 WEDO09 43 POWER FAILURE Do not Place the Unit in the Following Environments Do not place this facsimile unit in the environments described below Where temperature is excessively high such as places close to heaters radiators direct sunlight etc Where the temperature can become excessively low Where water or any chemicals may come in contact with the unit Where the humidity is too high Where dust dirt metal filings or hazardous gases may exist Near equipment with strong magnetic fields such as a radio s TV s audio amplifiers speaker s or other electric appliances Where condensation may easily result i e an environment subject to sudden temperature changes such as places close to an air conditioner or heater Where vibrations frequently occur Provide a space of 4 inches or more between the rear side of the unit and the wall Other Remarks Do not disassemble or modify the f
301. sion TRANSMITTING Memory Transmission A Memory Transmission first scans and stores the document into memory prior to a transmission to a remote facsimile s Memory Transmission is automatically initiated with any of the following dialing meth ods e One Touch Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 You may reserve a transmission even when other Memory Communications are under way In effort to minimize Memory Full conditions this facsimile is equipped with TOSHIBA s Memory Release Once scanning a document is started the facsimile will dial connect and start transmission to the remote location In the event the Memory becomes full Memory Release will hold originals in the ADF until the pages already stored into memory are successfully transmitted As each page is successfully trans mitted the Memory for subsequent pages will be released and the next page is scanned If a connection is not established during the scanning procedure Memory Release will be disabled see NOTES To bypass Memory Transmission see page 103 on Direct Document Transmission E File Number and Residual Memory e FILE NUMBERS The facsimile assigns a File Number to each transmission or polling reception job for internal control of reserved communications This File Number is very useful should it become necessary to cancel a memory operation It is a
302. software marked Not for Resale or Evaluation or Demonstration or Training Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible for any claims arising from the use of software other than the use for which it was specifically sold Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible for any claims by a third party No oral or written information or advice given to Wordcraft International Limited or given by Wordcraft International Limited or an authorised representative shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of this warranty COPYRIGHT Software and documentation produced by Wordcraft International Limited is protected by International Copyright Conventions TRADEMARKS Wordcraft is a trademark of Wordcraft International Limited All other trademarks are acknowledged Following installation the package will be automatically registered This is a legally binding agreement with Wordcraft International Limited If you feel you cannot accept the conditions defined above please return the complete software package unopened to your supplier 1999 Wordcraft International Limited CONTENTS LICENSE AGREEMENT wsssiesssssseessinsvivssensacasedavecesesevecevedecersnniins 258 CONTENTS eegen egegtegeedeeeeen btcaueaneanimanieenretinets 259 INTRODUCTION csicccscscscacvcsaucacssaaucassccnscamsstseamumracccentsavaninienss 260 INSTALLATION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION 00 261 Computer
303. ss 2 To only print a Transmission Re port when an error has occurred press To turn OFF automatic printing of Transmission Reports press PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE 2 OFF facsimile document on the Transmission Report press Q To not print a first page image of the facsimile document on the Transmission Report press A5 SIZE PRINT 1 ON 2 O0FF print on A5 size paper press Q To print the report normally press NOTES e To print the report on the A5 size paper the A5 size paper must be load ed to the Bypass Tray option for DP120F in portrait and the record ing paper size must also be set to OTHERS e If no paper is loaded in the Bypass Tray the re port will be printed from another tray The following screen is dis played to confirm your selection OPERATION COMPLE D Transmission Report Setting you may continue to select other Report settings referring to their associated pages for in struction or press STOP to exit the Report Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Multi Address Transmission Report Setting 1 TERA 2 Select the Option for 3 Set the Option for REPORT Menu Multi Address TX First Page Image Press Select the desired option for To print a first page image of MENU f SET MULTI ADD REPORT 1 ALWAYS 2 ON ERROR 2 OFF
304. ss STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Account Codes This feature provides valuable Account Code tracking informa tion for each facsimile transmis sion sent from the unit When a facsimile is transmitted the account code number will be recorded on the Transmis sion Journal Display the 1 ACCOUNT CODE 2 Select the Function Select Another Menu SETUP Item or Press Enable or Disable Account After completing this Configura MENU Codes tion Setting you may continue GGG ACCOUNT CODE IL ON 3 Select ON to enable Account Code prompting and printing on the Transmission Journal Or select OFF to disable Ac count Codes from being prompt ed and printed on the Transmis sion Journal el OPERATION COMPLE Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Print Density Setting The print density for reception copy PC printing and report printing can be set Five density levels are available from 2 lighter print to 2 darker print 1 ASe DENGICY 2 Enter the Desired 3 Select Another Menu Print Density Value SETUP Item or Press Move the cursor to the desired Aft
305. ss Default none Specifies a Sub Address for the Abbreviated Dial Number being registered The remote unit must support Sub Ad dress capabilities Tel Line Select Default first available Specifies which tel line is se lected when the 2nd Line is installed 9a Select the Communication 9b Complete the Option Setup 9C Delayed Communications Option To select default settings press oC To skip the Communication Op tions press When 1 YES is selected the COMM OPTIONS screen ap pears Complete the following steps for each item selected COM OPTIONS 2 DELAYED COMM 3 TX REPOR INE MONITOR UALITY TX UB ADDRESS 1 LINE SELECT YO Os HULO T These items are outside the LCD frame To view them use the w scroll key If you have completed the de sired Communication Options setting for this Abbreviated Dial Number select COMPLETE by pressing ABB NBR 001 PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY TO ENTER OR ENTER TO SKIP Skip to Step 10 To designate a specific time at which operations using this Ab breviated Dial Number will be dialed press DELAYED COMM TIME HH MM Enter the desired transmission start time in either the 12 hour or 24 hour format depending on the machine setup example 23 30 in the 24 hour format
306. sstnnnsnn nenn DIANO BE MOY EE Ce EC EE Access Codes see also Passwords and Security Codes Department Code Setting 0 2 cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaeeseenees Account Codes Account Code Entree ZONEN EES EEN NEEN dee TEEN Alphabet Dialing AAA Alphabetical Sort Ulst Auto Receive Mode eta deeaaeeeaaeaaeeaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeess Autodialer Abbreviated Dialer Dialing 20 0 2 eee ceeeceeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeneeaas Abbreviated Dialer Registration cccesecceeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaas Alphabet Dialing eiaa aiaei inai ii nA ai EEANN eda Group Number Registration cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeiaeeeeeeees One Touch Dialer Registration cccececceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeens One Touch Key Dialing essessesesseessseeessisssiressrrnssrrnsnnerennnsrnnssrenssns Te EE Automatic Supplies Order 0 eeeecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseneeeteaaeees B Bulletin Board BOX ET Bypass Tray Ee UE Le WEE EE CG Canceling Direct aA S S O N a aa a a aaa Memory Job Reservation ecccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseneeaeeees Open Mailbox Documents Local Hub ssssssssseessseessseesssessrrrssrnsses Diere lrans ar E e ear EREE TEE E RSE Gham Dial ee en E E sina Character Entry iiie enaa anna t aaa adaa a ada ea aetna 36 NL 37 serions ec a eee Bee ie A ce ace eae aa de eae de 37 FROPIACING EE 37 Cleaning Document Scanner Cleaning
307. t be set to ON For more information see page 165 NOTES When sending multi ad dress transmissions the cover sheet will be attached to the document for every address TTI will not be printed on the cover sheet Smart Batch is not available if this function is used When re sending a docu ment due to an error the cover sheet is again at tached to the retransmis sion In Transmission Reports and Journals the number of pages of each transmission includes the cover sheet When a Transmission Re port is issued with the docu ment image output the first page data of the facsimile will be printed but not the cover page data The cover sheet is always sent in Letter size The resolution for the cover sheet is fixed to FINE How ever if the receiving unit is set to STD the cover sheet is sent in STD 1 Load the Document 2 Display the COVER SHEET Menu 3 Select the Option 4 Enter the Remote Party s Name Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AAY 17 00 WED11 13 RESIDUAL ME TER TEL ORY 99 UMBER Select the direct function access view on the Operation Panel Press COVER SHEET CL COVER SHEET 2 PRINT To attach a cover sheet press oC ENTER REMOTE NAME
308. t to note that a password is required to retrieve a document from a Confidential Box using a remote facsimile If the contents of this mailbox are to be polled remotely a pass word must be used A password is not mandatory if the contents are to be printed locally Bulletin Board Box Bulletin Board box allows multiple document retrievals from the mailbox It is possible to add a password requirement for docu ment reservation so that only users with the correct password can reserve documents The password is not required to retrieve documents from the Bulletin Board Box Setting Up a Mailbox 1 Display the MAILBOX Menu 2 Select SETUP amp DELETE 3 Select BOX SETUP Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press ITU MAILBOX MAILBOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 BULLETIN BOARD 3 RELAY 4 BOX SETUP Select 4 BOX SETUP by pressing SETUP MAILBOX 1 COMPLETE 2 BOX SETUP 3 BOX DELETE Select 2 BOX SETUP by pressing TYPE OF BOX 1 CONFIDENTIAL TYPE 2 BULLETIN BRD TYPE 3 RELAY Setting Up a Mailbox continued 4 Select the Mailbox Type 5 Enter the Box Number 6 Select the Password Option 7 Enter the Password 8 Complete the Procedure Select the desired type of Mail box To select the Confidential Box
309. tach the Recording Paper Size Label 4 Close the Paper Tray Recording Paper Size Label 030 Pull the paper tray out and re move the recording paper Remove the Paper Guide Install the Paper Guide in the correct position for the new pa per size Paper size indicators have been conveniently molded into the pa per tray next to the paper post NOTE Install the Paper Guide se curely If you fail a PAPER EMPTY error will be dis played even when the paper is loaded in the paper tray Change the paper size label lo cated in the front right corner of the paper tray to match the new paper size Place the recording paper into the tray and push the tray into the machine e Check to make sure that the LCD display has returned to the time and date standby mode and no alarm lamps are illuminated e Make a copy using the new recording paper to confirm proper operation e Be sure to load the recording paper image side down Bypass Tray Installation The Bypass Tray comes stan dard with the DP125F The By pass Tray is available as an op tion for the DP120F You can select to print from the Bypass Tray for copy PC print and A5 size report Letter Le gal A4 and A5 size paper can be loaded into the Bypass Tray The Bypass Tray can also ac cept an envelope transparency or label Select Al OTHERS as the paper size
310. ted Dialing AY 17 00 WED11 13 TX REPORT Po seer the DE120F DP year le See page 98 i Apes only print a communication re Alphabet Dialing RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 2 ON ERROR port when an error condition is See page 99 TER TEL NUMBER encountered press To set the DP120F DP125F to never print a communication re port press COMM RESERVATION RESIDUAL MEMORY 80 F ER TEL NUMBER 4 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 Priority Transmission Priority Transmission permits you to execute a transmission before any other reserved trans mission job NOTES e Priority reservation is good for a Single Trans mission only e Only one communication can be reserved as a Pri ority Transmission When a transmission is already reserved as a Pri ority Transmission press PRIORITY ing CC will result in an error 1 Load the Document 2 Display the PRIORITY TX Menu 3 Enter the Facsimile Number Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 13 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press PRIORITY TX PRIORITY RESERVE ENTER TEL NUMBER SPEED DIAL KEY OR
311. the Keyboard see page 36 and Numeric Keypad press ENTER lt INT CODE 1 ADD 2 NOT NEEDED If you communicate internation ally select Otherwise select SET TERMINAL ID TEL NUMBER Enter your facsimile s telephone number press ENTER MAX 20 If the Line 2 board is installed set the international code and facsimile s telephone number for line 2 OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds LANGUAGE DATE amp TIME TERMINAL ID DIAL TYPE VG GA b k Press STOP Load your document face down into the Document Tray AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL TER TEL MEMORY 100 UMBER Dial the remote facsimile using the Dial Keypad located on the Operation Panel Remember to include any access numbers REDIAL such as 9 or press the __ af PAUSE ter the access number if you normally have to wait for a dial tone After the remote facsimile num ber has been entered using the keypad press the green START key START D Your TOSHIBA facsimile has been preset from the factory to receive facsimile messages No special setup is required to re ceive facsimile messages USER INTERFACE OPERATION Menu Operation Various functions of this fac simile can be used by selecting menu items with the menu screen displaye
312. the fac simile will answer the incoming call ABC GHI JKL PQRS TUV WXYZ When the desired ring count is displayed on the LCD press ENTER OPERATION COMPLE el Displayed for 2 seconds Returns to display the SETUP menu screen After completing this Configura tion Setting you may continue to select other settings referring to their associated pages for in structions or press STOP to exit the Configuration Setting mode and return to the Standby Mode Line 2 Operation If your facsimile is equipped with the Line 2 Board you can configure its operation as fol lows 1 Display the LINE 2 MODE Menu 2 Configure Line 2 Operation 3 Enter the Start Time and End Time 4 Select Another SETUP Item or Press MENU GGG LINE 2 MODE 1 TX amp RX 2 RECEPTIO 3 TIMER ONLY Select 1 TX RX if the second line is used for both transmis sion and reception by pressing Default Select 2 RECEPTION ONLY if the second line option is used for reception only by pressing Select 3 TIMER if the second line option is used for reception only during a specific time range set in Step 3 When either 1 or 2 is selected the OPERATION COMPLET ED message is displayed Con tinue to the final step When 3 is selected the follow ing screen is displayed to set the time
313. to save NEW YORK ter to be deleted your change Delete the character by pressing Jer Press ET ENTER SS LI to save your change INITIAL SETUP Initial Setting Summary This facsimile has many user initial settings For your convenience a quick reference summary of all user initial settings are shown on the right Each of these initial setting is discussed in detail throughout the remainder of this section Use the following procedures to access one or more of these ini tial settings 1 Enter the Configuration Menu 2 Select the Desired Initial Setting 1 4 MENU Press GE The initial Menu Screen displays eene eegent 2 LISTS 3 INITIAL SETUP 4 DEFAULT SETTINGS J Press 3 to enter INITIAL SETUP The Installation sub menu displays 1 LANGUAGE 2 DATE amp TIME 3 TERMINAL ID 4 DIAL TIPE NOTE Only 4 selections can be displayed at one time Press LTA or 4 until the desired Initial Setting is highlighted or enter the desired Initial Setting 1 through 4 from the list below The detailed initial setting procedure for each setting is shown in parentheses after the initial setting 1 LANGUAGE Page 39 Selects ENGLISH FRENCH or SPANISH for displays and printing 2 DATE amp TIME Page 40 Sets the Month Day Year amp Time for your machine You may select to use the
314. transmitted one by one Direct Transmission as Default Setting 1 Load the Document 2 Dial the Facsimile Number 3 Start Dialing 4 Connect the Line to the Remote Party This procedure will discuss Di rect Transmission when se lected as the default setting or when Residual Memory has been depleted Load the document face down in the Document Tray see page 88 Adjust the resolution and con trast if desired see page 89 AY 17 00 WED11 49 RESIDUAL MEMORY 100 TER TEL NUMBER Example of screen displayed when Residual Memory has been depleted AY 17 00 WED11 49 d i RESIDUAL MEMORY 0 TER TEL NUMBER Dial the facsimile number of the remote party using any of the four dialing methods e One Touch Key Dialing See page 97 e Abbreviated Dialing See page 98 e Alphabet Dialing See page 99 e Keypad Dialing See page 100 STOP e Press if a dialing er ror occurs Example of screen displayed while a number is entered using Keypad Dialing COMM RESERVATION TEL NUMBER MAX128 0559761234 Once the facsimile number is entered the dialing starts DIALING FILE NBR 025 0559761234 If the destination facsimile is busy the screen below is dis played WAITING TO REDIAL RESIDUAL MEMORY 100
315. up OT _ One Touch Key Numbers ABB Abbreviated Dial Numbers Issues a list of One Touch Key or Abbreviated Dial Numbers registered in Multi address Groups or Multi polling Groups Printing Procedure Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press TEL LIST PRINT J EPHONE NBRS LIST e vE zZ D E E ROUP NUMBERS I B ABB UMBERS G O E TOUCH NBRS EPORT Ow w N D E KS To select 3 GROUP NUM BERS press Preset Dialing Number Lists continued One Touch Number List ONE TOUCH NUMBER INFORMATION PAGE 001 TIME MAY 17 00 14 25 TEL NUMBERI1 12345678901234567890 TEL NUMBER2 12345678901234567890 NAME ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXY212345678901234 OT NBR NAME FUNCTION ABB FAX NUMBER amp E MAIL TIME MONI BPS REPORT LINE MAILMODE 01 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 23 45 ON 144 ON 2 1234567 0987654321 SUB 12345678901234567890 SEP 112233445566 PWD KK KKKKK KKK KKK KKK KK 09 ABB NBR 170 22 GROUP NBR 0123 35 REDFIELD HS 9 1 605 1234567 23 40 One Touch Key Number Station Name or Designated Time use of the key Line Monitoring Abbreviated Dial Number Group Number or actual Dial Number Alternate Dial Number SUB SEP or PWD Communication Speed Limit x 100 TX R
316. up down the menu screen to select this option INPUT CONFIDENTIAL BOX NUMBER MAX20 Y A or INPUT BULLETIN BRD BOX NUMBER MAX20 Reserving a Document to a Mailbox Local Hub continued 5 Enter the Box Number 6 Enter the Password for Reservation d Complete the Procedure Enter the Box Number max 20 digits Then press ENTER i If you are reserving to a Confi dential Box go to Step 7 If you are reserving to a Bulletin Board Box go to Step 6 INPUT BULLETIN BRD PASSWORD MAX20 Enter the password to access the Bulletin Board Box GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ INPUT BULLETIN BRD PASSWORD MAX20 een Then press ENTER a The facsimile starts scanning the document into memory The following screen is dis played for about 2 seconds be fore returning to the Standby Mode SCANNING INTO MEMORY FILE NBR 231 RESIDUAL MEMORY 90 Retrieving Polling a Document from a Mailbox Remote Hub This section describes the pro cedure to retrieve a document from a Confidential Box or Bulle tin Board Box in a remote hub unit 1 Display the MAILBOX Menu 2 Select the Mailbox Type 3 Select POLL FROM MAILBOX 4 Enter the Box Number Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press
317. urice Etisi eS ETTEN T tahia OPHEF T rl s DPF rien OPAT Un P j Select Toshiba in the Manufacturers field and the model that is connected to your PC in the Models field Click Next ap Ur ogpicefb Ee ner pia i iil a e a r roe Paama jap te D haaien kee Sep lirema Fri Paski erg shee vicer ba Be deeg Zeie Dace lier kk acces Dyrnes Ma Tato itt ae an i i Cisi Be ipa d n pd Se pa R lype r ers Bat Hedi Carel Default System Device Name and Descriptive Device Name are already entered Rename them if required jp Unie Ee diia rae ee ee ebe brr Sep Click Next linea Peo ran i pra se epee bo Rm deeg Zeie Dice Hae acces Terie ime Hha ab Hi nim iris ab j i Cisi Pe ipa d tp pai i pa T Ipea F recom Hri ija Cane Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer continued 6 Select the Port that your DP120F DP125F is connected to 7 Select Yes install TWAIN components 8 Select Yes create a printer M sann adaa deiina i p i pii i deg t pe Hri ija Dar Click Next A iesnas aa eye Sea p a a D Ain reo ede Ter Eer ce bg fod be cee Se en Pee pr De pina eed te al ien Pidh areas ane harap Ir Cat raa Tadh poe py hee ogee Th reent If there is a TOSHIBA Viewer TWAIN resource avail able for the DP120F DP125F you are using TOSHIBA Viewer will ask if the TWAIN resource should be in stalled as you c
318. vice representative Optional PCL board is out of order PCL print ing do not work Power your machine off then back on If the error condition is cleared confirm normal op eration If the error condition returns call your service representative The machine system is out of order Power your machine off then back on If the error condition is cleared confirm normal oper ation If the error condition returns call your service representative Paper Jam Error Codes Paper jam error codes indicate where within the machine a recording paper jam has occurred using a 2 digit number Error 10 A paper jam has occurred within the paper feed section of the Re cording Paper Tray when an Op tional Recording Paper Tray is in stalled upper tray Open the right side access door and clear any paper Then draw out the Recording Paper Tray upper and remove any jammed recording paper A paper jam has occurred within the paper feed section of the mid dle recording paper tray Open the right side access door and clear any paper Then draw out the Recording Paper Tray middle and remove any jammed recording paper A paper jam has occurred within the paper feed section of the lower recording paper tray Open the right side access door and clear any paper Then draw out the Recording Paper Tray lower and remove any jammed recording paper A paper jam has occurred within the paper feed se
319. y Mode OPERATION COMPLE el Secure RX Manual Activation This section describes the pro cedure to manually activate Se cure RX NOTES In order to manually activate Secure RX you must first activate Secure RX by going through the Secure RX Ac cess Code setting See page 176 1 Display the SECURE RX Menu 2 Select START or STOP Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press SECURERX NOTE If Secure RX Activation is set to OFF in the Secure RX Activation Period Setting an error will result upon press SECURERX f in the operation above The message NOT ALLOWED NOW will be dis played for 2 seconds then the screen returns to the Standby Mode SECURE RX 2 PRINT To manually activate Secure RX press The following screen is dis played for 2 seconds to confirm your selection Then the display returns to the Standby Mode OPERATION COMPLE H D Secure RX Print This section describes the pro cedure to manually print out document data received into memory during Secure RX op eration 1 Display the SECURE RX Menu 2 Select PRINT 3 Enter the Security Code Turn the Flip Panel to the 50 73 view to select the desired Function Key Press SECURERX NOTE If Secure RX Activation is set to OFF in the Se
320. you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the neces sary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this facsimile machine please contact TOSHIBA AMERICA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS INC Electronic Imaging Division 2 Musick Irvine CA 92618 1631 for repair warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved The equipment may not used on coin service provided by the telephone network connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission or corporation commission for information This device is equipped with a USOC RJ11C connector THE TELEPHONE CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT The Telephone Consumer Pro tection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such a message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the mess

Toshiba DP125F Fax Machine User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents